2004 hyundai santa fe owners manual

253
 2004

Upload: ital-stuff

Post on 10-Jul-2015

4.076 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 1/253

 

 2004

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 2/253

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 3/253

 

 A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

 ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

 ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 4/253

 

OWNER'S MANUAL

 A030A02O-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipAs a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 5/253

 A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warrantyo New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only)o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

 A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.

Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 6/253

 A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.

 A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2004 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.

!

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 7/253

 A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.

 A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

!

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 8/253

 A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 9/253

 A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Genuine HyundaiParts caused by the installation or failure of 

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized deale

1-800-826-CARS

 A100A01L A100A02L A

 A

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 10/253

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 11/253

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

B250A03O-AAT

B25

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 12/253

1. Multi-Function Light Switch2. Instrument Cluster 3. Horn and Driver's Airbag4. Ignition Switch5. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch6. Front Fog Light Switch (If installed)7. Hazard Warning Light Switch8. Digital Clock9. Rear Window Defroster Switch10.Audio System (If installed)

11.Passenger's Airbag12.Hood Release Lever 

13.Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)14.Traction Control System Switch (If installed)15.Cruise Control Switch (If installed)16.Steering Wheel Tilt Lever 17.Ashtray18.Parking Brake Lever 19.Shift Lever (If installed)20.Power Outlet21.Cigarette Lighter 22.Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel

23.Glove Box

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water immediately.

!

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 13/253

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A03O-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-42.

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator 

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level

Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Malfunction Indicator LightSeat Belt Reminder Light and Chime

Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)

Cruise Indicator (If installed)

 ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)

4WD System Warning Light (If installed)

Traction Control Off Indicator Light (If installed)

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 14/253

1

Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2

Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door .............................................................................. 1-4Power Windows .......................................................... 1-10Seats ........................................................................... 1-11Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-18Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-24Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) system................. 1-31Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-38Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-42Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-48Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-50Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-56Mirror........................................................................... 1-61Hood Release ............................................................. 1-72Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-75Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-78

Stereo Sound System ................................................. 1-94Audio System.............................................................. 1-96Antenna..................................................................... 1-123

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 15/253

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limitedranty may not cover damage to thsystem and any performance problemare caused by the use of fuels contamethanol or fuels containing MTBE (M

Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.gen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-

ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.

B010A02A-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

If leaded gasoline is used, it will cause thecatalytic converter to become ineffective andthe emission control system to malfunction.This can also result in increased maintenanceexpense.

To avoid accidental use of leaded fuel, the largernozzle used with leaded gasoline at service

stations cannot be inserted into the fuel tankopening of your Hyundai.

CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle

shut off when refueling.

o The fuel cap must be tightened at least3 clicks, otherwise " " light mayilluminate.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels contMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) shou

be used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicformance and produce vapor lock ostarting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol)

not be used in your Hyundai. This type can reduce vehicle performance and dacomponents of the fuel system.

!

B010A01O

UNLEADED

FUEL ONLY

!

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 16/253

FEATURES OF YOUR

KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent deposit

formation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durabi lity of

your Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.

B030A01A-AAT

B0

For greater convenience, the same keyates all the locks in your Hyundai. How

because the doors can be locked withoutcarrying a spare key is recommended inyou accidentally lock one key inside the

 

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 17/253

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

4 DOOR LOCKS

!

B040A01A-AATB030C01Y-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH

(If installed)

Whenever a door is opened, the ignition switchwill be illuminated for your convenience, pro-vided the ignition switch is not in the "ON"position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.

B030C01L

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerou

fore you drive away (especially ifare children in the car), be sure that doors are securely closed and lockthat the doors cannot be openedthe inside. This helps ensure thdoors will not be opened accideAlso, when combined with the puse of seat belts, locking the doorskeep occupants from being ejectedthe car in case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always loand avoid oncoming traffic.

B030B01A-AAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is stamped on the number platethat came with the keys to your Hyundai. Thiskey number plate should not be left with the keysbut kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. Thekey number should also be recorded in a placewhere it can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.

B030B01B

 

FEATURESOFYOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 18/253

FEATURES OF YOUR

B040B01O-AAT

Locking, unlocking front doors with a

key

o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-ing the key once toward the rear. If you wishto unlock all doors, turn the key againtoward the rear within 4 seconds.

B040B01O

LOCK UNLOCK

B040C02O-AAT

Locking From the Outside

(Driver's side)

The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch

driver's door to the "LOCK" posonly the driver's door can be lock

o If your vehicle is equipped with c

door locking system, the door wlock if the key is left in the ignition swhen the front doors are closed.

o When locking the door this way, beful not to lock the door with the igkey left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chances of theft, aremove the ignition key, close aldows, and lock all doors and taiwhen leaving your vehicle unatte

B040C01O

 

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 19/253

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

6

The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.

B045C02O-AAT

Locking From the Outside

(Passenger's side)

B040C01O-D

B040D01O-AAT

Locking From the Inside

(Driver's side)

To lock the doors from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position.

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the

driver's door to the "LOCK" position,only the driver's door can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the red mark onthe switch is not visible.

o The driver's door can be opened by

pulling the inside door handle even if thelock switch is depressed.

HSM362

UNLOCKLOCK

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch o

passenger's door to the "LOCK"tion, all doors can be locked.

o If your vehicle is equipped with c

door locking system, the door wlock if the key is left in the ignition swhen the front doors are closed.

o When locking the door this way, beful not to lock the door with the igkey left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chances of theft, aremove the ignition key, close aldows, and lock all doors and taiwhen leaving your vehicle unatte

 

FEATURESOFYOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 20/253

FEATURES OF YOUR

B040E03A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Your Hyundai is equipped with a "child-protec-tor" rear door lock assembly. When the lockmechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot beopened from the inside. Its use is recommendedwhenever there are small children in the rearseat.

To engage the child-protector feature so thatthe door cannot be opened from the inside,move the child-protector lever to the " "position and close the door. Move the lever tothe opposite direction of " " position whennormal door operation is desired.

If you wish to be able to open the door from theoutside, pull the outside door handle to its upposition.

B045D01O-AAT

Locking From the Inside

(Passenger's side)

To lock the doors from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position. When this is done, neither the outsidenor the passenger's inside door handles can beused.

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the

passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-tion, all doors can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the red mark on

the switch is not visible.

HSM362-D

HSM170-1

LOCK

UNLOCK

B040G02O-AAT

Central Door Locks (If installed)

The central door locking switch is locateddriver's arm rest. It is operated by depreither the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" of the doswitch.

NOTE:o When pushing the "LOCK" of the d

door lock switch, all vehicle doolock. If any door is open when the sis depressed, the door will remain lwhen closed.

o When pushing the "UNLOCK" o

switch, all vehicle doors will unlo

B04

 

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 21/253

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

8 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B075B01O-AAT

Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arsystem as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the iswitch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood and taare closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitterkeyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, thsignal lights will blink once to indicate th

system is armed.

LOCKUNLOCK

PANIC

B070A01A-AAT

(If installed)

This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages : the first is the

"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stageand the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarmwith blinking of the turn signal litghts.

B070F01O-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal

lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmit-ter.

2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks,the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicatethat the system is disarmed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all doors, press the"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter againwithin 4 seconds.

 

FEATURESOFYOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 22/253

U SO OU

B075C01O-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccurs while the car is parked and the systemis armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.

2) The tail gate is opened without using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

3) The engine hood is opened.

The siren will sound and the turn signal lights willblink continuously for 27 seconds (This hap-pens 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock thedoor or tail gate using the transmitter or theignition key.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

NOTE:o If any door, tail gate or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed. If this happens, rearm the systemas described above.

o If the "LOCK" button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds after pushing the"LOCK" button on the transmitter, thesiren will sound once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

CAUTION:Do not arm the system until all passengershave left the car. If the system is armed whilea passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm

may be activated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

!

!

B075D01O-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed by usintransmitter or the ignition key.

The driver's door is unlocked by depronce the "UNLOCK" button on the transIf you wish to unlock all doors, press theLOCK" button on the transmitter again wseconds.

Whenever the step above is completed, tsignal lights will blink twice to indicate thsystem is disarmed.

If any door, tail gate or engine hood is not owithin 30 seconds, the system will be rea

B075E01O-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the trans2. At the same time, the siren will sound a

turn signal lights will blink for 30 sec3. To turn off the system, push the "P

button again on the transmitter.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 23/253

110 POWER WINDOWS

B060A03Y-AAT

The power windows operate when the ikey is in the "ON" position. The main sw

are located on the driver's armrest and cthe front and rear windows on both sidesvehicle. The windows may be opened pressing the appropriate window switcclosed by pulling up the switch. To opwindow on the driver's side, press the swhalfway down. The window moves as lothe switch is operated. To fully open the dwindow automatically, press the switcdown. In automatic operation, the windofully open even if you let go of the switch. Tat the desired opening, pull up and releaswitch.

(1)

Open

C

B070E02HP-AAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins to getweak, it may take several pushes on the buttonto lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not

light. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a bladescrewdriver as shown in the illustration.

2. Remove the old battery from the case andnote the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facing

down), then insert it in the transmitter.

HSM327

B070E02A-1

Screwdriver

Case

Battery

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 24/253

SEATS

!In order to prevent operation of the passengerfront and rear windows, a window lock switch(2)is provided on the armrest of the driver's door.

To disable the power windows, press the win-dow lock switch. To revert to normal operation,press the window lock switch a second time.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for 30seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removedfrom the ignition switch.If the front doors are opened during this 30second period, the power windows can no

longer be operated without the ignition keyturned to the "ON" position.

WARNING:(1)Be careful that someone's head, handsand body are not trapped by a closingwindow.

(2)Never try to operate the main switch onthe driver's door and the individual doorwindow switch in opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot be openedor closed.

(3)Do not leave children alone in the car.Always remove the ignition key for their

safety.

HSM050HSM441-A

(2)

Open

Close

B080A01A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

!WARNING:

Never attempt to adjust the seat whvehicle is moving. This could result iof control or an accident which may death, serious injury, or property da

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 25/253

112

!

!B080B02A-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.

B080B01O

B080C01A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury ievent of a collision or a sudden stop

the driver and passenger seatbacks salways be in an upright position whivehicle is in motion. The protectionvided by the seat belts and airbagsfrontal collision may be reduced scantly when the seatbacks are recThere is greater risk that the drivepassenger will slide under the seawhich may result in serious injury if aoccurs when the seatbacks are recThe seat belt cannot provide full protto an occupant if the seat back is rec

B080C01O

WARNING:

To ensure the seat is locked securely, at-tempt to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the lock release lever.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 26/253

!WARNING:

o For maximum effectiveness in case of anaccident, the headrest should be ad-

justed so the top of the headrest is at thesame height as the top of the occupant'sears. The use of a cushion that holds thebody away from the seatback is notrecommended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with the head-rests removed as severe injury to anoccupant may occur in the event of anaccident. Headrests may provide pro-tection against severe neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.

B080E01O-AAT

Lumbar Support Control

(Driver's seat only) (If installed)

To adjust the lumbar support, turn the hanthe inboard side of the seat. To increaamount of lumbar support, pull the levward. To decrease it, push the lever towarear.

1. Minimum support2. Maximum support

B080D02A-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, pushit down while pressing the lock knob.

HSM365

B0

Lock knob

12

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 27/253

114

!

B080F01A-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment

(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the front knob forward or rear-ward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion, turn the rear knob forward or rear-ward.

B080F01O

B090A01Y-AAT

POWER DRIVER'S SEAT (If installed)

The driver's seat can be adjusted appropriatelyby using the control knobs on the left side of theseat. Before driving, adjust the seat to the

proper position so as to easily control thesteering wheel, pedals and switches on theinstrument panel.

CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at the same time.

WARNING:o Never attempt to adjust the seat whilethe vehicle is moving. This could resultin loss of control or an accident causingdeath, serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close tothe airbag.

B090B01Y-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rear

Pull the control knob forward or backw

move the seat forward or backward desired position. Release the knob and thwill remain at that position.

1. Seat Back Reclining Control Knob2. Seat Cushion Forward, Rearward and

Adjusting Control Knob

B0

!1

2

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 28/253

!B090D01Y-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Rotate the upper portion of the control knob

forward or backward to recline the seatback tothe desired position. Release the control knoband the seatback will remain in that position.

WARNING:To minimize the risk of personal injthe event of a collision or a sudden

both the driver's and passenger's seashould remain in an upright positionthe car is in motion. The protectionvided by the seat belts and airbags mreduced significantly when the seatare reclined. There is a greater risk thseat occupants will slide under theresulting in serious injury if a crash owhen the seatbacks are reclined. Thbelt cannot provide full protection occupant if the seat back is reclined

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment

Move the front portion of the control knob up or

down to raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion. Move the rear portion of the controlknob up or down to raise or lower the rear partof the seat cushion.

B090C01O B090D01O

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 29/253

16

!

B080G01FC-AAT

UNDER TRAY (If installed)

The tray is located under the front passenger's

seat. It is opened by up and pulling forward.

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the trayshould be kept closed when the car is inmotion.

HSM189

B100A02Y-AAT

SEAT WARMER (If Installed)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the front

seats during cold weather. With the ignition key inthe "ON" position, push either of the switches towarm the driver's seat or the passenger's seat.During mild weather or under conditions wherethe operation of the seat warmer is not needed,keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

NOTE:o The seat warmer will not operate if am-

bient temperature is higher than82.4°F(28°C) ± 3.5°F(3.5°C).

o If the seat warmer doesn't works whenambient temperature is lower than75.2°F(24°C), it must be checked at au-thorized dealer.

B085A01O-BAT

REAR SEAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, push the sefolding lever toward the headrest, and rit after the desired seatback angle is achWhen you recline the seatback to desirsition, always be sure it has locked into po

CAUTION:When reclining the seatback, you sadjust the seatback folding lever

standing.

B340G01O

H

!

Seatbackfolding lever

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 30/253

NOTE:o Before folding the seatback, place the

rear seat belt buckles in the buckle clipson the seatback. This will prevent theseat belt buckles from becoming cov-ered by the seat cushion when it isreturned to the seating position.

o The rear seat belt buckles must be re-moved from the buckle clips by pressingrelease button when in use.

4. Hook the securing loop under the seaion to the hanger on the backside seatback.

5. Insert the headrests between the seand the seat cushion.

6. To return the seatback to its normal popush the seatback folding lever and rethe above procedure.

o When you return the seatback to its position, always be sure it is lockeposition by pulling and pushing on thethe seatback.

B085B01O-AAT

Folding Rear Seatback and Seat

Cushion

For greater convenience, the entire seatbackand seat cushion may be folded down and up.

1. Remove the headrests.2. Pull strap to fold up the seat cushion.3. Push and hold the seatback folding lever (1)

inward, then push down the seatback.

B080D01O

HSM293-A B0

(1)

Strap

Buckle clips

Hanger

Securing loop

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 31/253

18 SEAT BELTS

B150B03Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint lawsshould be aware of the specific requiremyour state. Child and/or infant safety seatbe properly placed and installed in the reaInformation about the use of these res

begins on page 1-24.

!!B140A01B-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback.

WARNING:o The purpose of the fold-up rear seat

cushion and the fold-down rear seatback is to allow you to carry more objectsthan could otherwise be accommodated.Never allow passengers to sit on thecargo area while the car is moving. Thisis not a proper seating position and noseat belts are available for use when theseat back is folded down.This could result in serious injury ordeath in case of an accident or a suddenstop. Objects should not extend higherthan the top of the front seatbacks.This could allow cargo to slide forward

and cause injury or damage during sud-den stops.o Make sure that the headrests are prop-

erly fixed in place to minimize the risk ofsevere injury in case of an accident.

o When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after being folded down,be careful not to damage the seatbeltwebbing or buckle. In addition, do notallow the seatbelt webbing or buckle toget caught or pinched in the rear seat.

B080P01O

B150A01S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:

All occupants of the vehicle must weaseat belts at all times. Note that this vis equipped with a Supplemental Res(Airbag) System as discussed begon page 1-31. The seat belts must bein conjunction with the supplemairbag system. State laws require thator all occupants of the vehicle usebelts. The possibility of increased injseverity of injury in an accident wincreased if this elementary safety prtion is not observed. In addition, follo

other instructions provided in this se

!

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 32/253

!B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap

portion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER

place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lapbelt portion should be placed as low and snugly

as possible on the hips, not across the abdo-men. For specific recommendations, consult aphysician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an person is being transported. When this essary, you should consult a physici

recommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) shouldattempt to use a single seat belt. Thisincrease the severity of injuries in caseaccident.

B150G01A-AATDo Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the evan accident and to achieve maximum effness of the restraint system, all passeshould be sitting up and the front seats sbe in an upright position when the car is mA seat belt cannot provide proper protethe person is lying down in the rear seat ofront seat is in a reclined position.

WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. In a collision, an unre-strained child can become a "missile" in-side the car. The force required to hold achild on your lap could be so great that youcould not hold the child. Any child riding inthe vehicle should always be in a properrestraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrained

in the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.The restraint must be appropriate for yourchild's height and weight. Check the labelon the child restraint for this information.See page 1-24.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 33/253

20

!

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are not

damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat.

WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seatbelts can't do their job when you're re-clined.The shoulder belt can't do its job becauseit won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crashyou could go into it with great force, receiv-ing serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be applied there, notat your strong pelvic bones.

This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright.Then sit back in the seat and wear your seatbelt properly. See page 1-21.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. become dirty, they can be cleaned by umild soap solution and warm water. Bleac

strong detergents or abrasives should used because they may damage and wthe fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or asseshould be replaced if the vehicle hasinvolved in an accident. This should be

even if no damage is visible. Additionaltions concerning seat belt operation shodirected to your Hyundai Dealer.

!

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 34/253

! WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the lockedposition when the vehicle is moving.

o The misadjustment of height of theshoulder belt could reduce the effective-ness of the seat belt in a crash.

B180A01A-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System with

Emergency Locking Retractor

To Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the reand insert the metal tab into the buckle.will be an audible "click" when the tab locthe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the length only after the lap belt portion is ad

manually so that it fits snugly around youIf you lean forward in a slow, easy motiobelt will extend and let you move around. is a sudden stop or impact, however, the block into position. It will also lock if you try forward too quickly.

NOTE:If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedthe ignition key is in the "ON" positioseat belt warning light will flash anwarning chime will sound for approximsix seconds.

B170A04Y-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT

SHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of the 4 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-

priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pullit up. To lower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.

B170A01E

B180A01L

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into the position.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 35/253

22

!

NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-vides the same level of protection for seatedpassengers in either emergency or auto-matic locking modes, it is recommendedthat seated passengers use the emergency

locking feature for improved convenience.The automatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installation. Toconvert from the automatic locking featureto the emergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, the seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children must always be seatbelted inthe rear seats. Never allow children toride in the front passanger seat.

o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearest thedoor for the most effective protection.Never wear the seat belt under the arm

nearest the door. Wearing the belt underthe arm nearest the door could causeserious or fatal injuries in an accident.

B190A01Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and Rear

Seat 3-Point System with Combination

Locking Retractor

To Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-modate the installation of child restraint systems.Although a combination retractor is also installedin the front passenger seat position, Hyundaistrongly recommends that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infantrestraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To

fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle. When not securing a child restraint,the seat belt operates in the same way as thedriver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. When the seat belt is fullyextended from the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, the seat belt

operation changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend (Automatic Locking RetractorType). See page 1-29.

WARNING:o Avoid wearing twisted seat be

twisted belt can't do its job as welcollision, it could even cut into yosure the belt webbing is straight antwisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belbing or hardware. If the belt webbhardware is damaged, replace it.

!

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 36/253

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-

lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.

B220A01A-AAT

SEAT BELTS (2-Point Static Type

(Center Rear Seat)

To Fasten Your Seat Belt

To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insmetal tab into the locking buckle. There an audible "click" when the tab locks inbuckle. Check to make sure the belt is prlocked and that the belt is not twisted.

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the arm

nearest the door.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

B210A01L

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

B200A01L

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 37/253

24 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

!

B230A02O-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in thseat and must always be properly restraminimize the risk of injury in an accident, sstop or sudden maneuver. According todent statistics provided by the National

way Traffic Safety Administration (NHchildren are safer when properly restraithe rear seats than in the front seat. children not in a child restraint should usof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint lawsshould be aware of the specific requiremyour state. Child and/or infant safety seatbe properly placed and installed in the reaYou must use a commercially availablerestraint system that meets the requiremthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a ctheir restraints are not properly securesmall children and babies, a child seat orseat must be used. Before buying a pachild restraint system, make sure it fits yoseat and seat belts, and fits your child. all the instructions provided by the maturer when installing the child restraint s

B220C01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt, press

the button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:The center lap belt latching mechanism isdifferent from those for the rear seat shoul-der belts. When fastening the rear seatshoulder belts or the center lap belt, makesure they are inserted into the correct buck-les to obtain maximum protection from theseat belt system and assure proper opera-

tion.

HSM372-A

B220B01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

With a 2-point static type seat belt, the length

must be adjusted manually so it fits snuglyaround your body. Fasten the belt and pull on theloose end to tighten. The belt should be placedas low as possible on your hips, not on yourwaist. If the belt is too high, it could increase thepossibility of your being injured in an accident.

HTB226

ShortenCorrect

Too high

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 38/253

!WARNING:

o Always make sure that the shoulder beltportion of the lap/shoulder belt is posi-tioned midway over the shoulder andnever across the neck or behind theback. Moving the child closer to thecenter of the vehicle may help provide agood shoulder belt fit. The lap belt por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt must alwaysbe positioned as low as possible on thechild's hips, and as snug as possible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the use ofan approved booster seat in the rear seatin order to raise the child's seating height

so that the seat belt will properly fit thechild.Before purchasing a booster seat, makesure that it meets applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards and thatit is satisfactory for use with this vehicle.

o Never allow a child to stand up or kneelon the seat.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over a seatback;it may not provide adequate security inan accident.

WARNING:o Never allow a child to be held in a pe

arms while they are in a moving veas this could result in serious injthe child in the event of an accidensudden stop. Holding a child in a mvehicle does not provide the childany means of protection during andent, even if the person holding theis wearing a seat belt.

!!WARNING:

o A child restraint system must be placedin the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thusonly use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.

o Since a safety belt or child restraint sys-tem can become very hot if it is left in aclosed vehicle, be sure and check theseat cover and buckles before placing achild there.

o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the luggage compartmentor fasten it with a safety belt so that it willnot be thrown forward in the case of asudden stop or an accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a childrestraint should sit in the rear seat and berestrained with the available lap/shoul-der belts. Never allow children to ride inthe front passanger seat.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

26

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 39/253

26

B230C04O-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the

"Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders are locatedon the rear luggage compartment floor.

To install the child restraint seat

Tetheranchor cover

Child RestraintHook Holder

B230B02O

This symbol indicates the location of each userready tether anchorage.

1. Open the tether anchor cover on th

luggage compartment floor.

B230B01E-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is required. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in the vehicle'srear seat since this can make an importantcontribution to safety. Your vehicle is providedwith three child restraint hook holders for install-ing the child seat or infant seat.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 40/253

!

B230D03E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seat

the "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make seats that are labeled as ISOFIX or IScompatible child seats. These seats inclurigid or webbing mounted attachmentconnect to two ISOFIX anchors at sseating positions in your vehicle. This tchild seat eliminates the need to use seato attach the child seat for forward-facinseats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided ivehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located

left and right outboard rear seating posTheir locations are shown in the illustThere is no ISOFIX anchor provided fcenter rear seating position.

B

For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder and tighten to secure

the seat.

WARNING:o To install the Child Restraint Seat, for

safety reasons the Seat should be posi-tioned rearmost with the seatback in avertical position, not reclined.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a child

restraint lower anchorage point. The im-proper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

B230B01O-1Front of Vehicle

Tether StrapHook

ChildRestraintHookHolders

Rear luggage compartment floor

2. Route the child restraint seat strap over the

seatback.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

28

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 41/253

28

!WARNING:

If the child restraint seat is not ancproperly, the risk of a child being serinjured or killed in a collision grea

creases.

The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.

B230D02O-A

ISOFIXAnchor

ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

Follow the child seat manufacturer's intions to properly install safety seats with ISor ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX chstraint seat, assure that the seat is pr

attached to the ISOFIX and tether anAlso, test the safety seat before you plachild in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Ato tug the seat forward. Check to seeanchors hold the seat in place.

HSM418-A

!WARNING:

o Do not install a child restraint seat at thecenter of the rear seat using the vehicle'sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors areonly provided for the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Do notmisuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempt-ing to attach a child sefety seat in themiddle of the rear seat position to theISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child seatISOFIX attachments may not be strongenough to secure the child restraint seatproperly in the center of the rear seat andmay break, causing serious injury ordeath.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. Theimproper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatiblechild seat only to the appropriate loca-tions shown.

o Always follow the installation and useinstructions provided by the manufac-turer of the child restraint.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 42/253

!

B230G01O-AAT

Installation on Outboard Rear Seats

WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Auto

Locking mode, the child restraintem can move when your vehicle tustops abruptly.

o Do not install any child restraint sin the front passenger seat. Shouaccident occur and cause the passside airbag to deploy, it could seinjure or kill an infant or child sea

an infant or child seat. Thereforeuse a child restraint system in thseat of your vehicle.

To install a child restraint system in the outboard

rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. This willengage the seat belt retractor automatic lockingfeature, which allows the seat belt to retract butnot extend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that the lap portionof the belt is tight around the child restraintsystem and the shoulder portion of the belt ispositioned so that it can not interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged the Auto-

matic Locking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in theAutomatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.

After installation of the child restraint systto move it in all directions to be sure threstraint system is securely installed. If yoto tighten the belt, pull more webbing towaretractor. When you unbuckle the seat ballow it to retract, the retractor will automa

revert back to its normal seated passEmergency Locking usage condition.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restrain

tem in any seating position, reainstructions supplied by the chistraint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate scribed, have the system checked diately by your authorized Hyundai dB230G01L

B230F01A-AAT

Installation on Rear Seat Center Posi-

tion

Use the center seat belt for the rear seat tosecure the child restraint system as illustrated.After installation of the child restraint system,rock the child seat back and forth, and side toside to ensure that it is properly secured by theseat belt.If the child seat moves, readjust the length of theseat belt. Then, if equipped, insert the childrestraint tether strap hook into the child restrainthook holder and tighten to secure the seat.Always refer to the child restraint systemmanufacturer's recommendation before install-ing the child restraint system in your vehicle.

B230F01A

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

30

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 43/253

30

!

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components. Their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.

2. The seat belt must be adjusted to thecorrect position.

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passe

pre-tensioner seat belts will be actin certain frontal collisions. Thetensioner seat belts can be actwith the airbags. The pre-tensione

be activated even if the seat belts abeing worn at the time of the col

o When the pre-tensioner seat belactivated, a loud noise may be hearfine dust, which may appear to be smay be visible in the passengerpartment. These are normal opeconditions and are not hazardou

o Although it is harmless, the finemay cause skin irritation and shoube breathed for prolonged periods.your hands and face thoroughly af

accident in which the pre-tensionebelts were activated.

B180B01O

1

2

3

Driver's airbag

Passenger'sairbag

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly, theseat belt retractor will lock into position. Incertain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact

against the occupant's body.

B180B02A-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedwith the airbags.

HXG229

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

 

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 44/253

(AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

!B240A03F-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with a SuppleRestraint (Airbag) System. The indicatithe system's presence are the lettersAIRBAG" embossed on the airbag pad cthe steering wheel and the passenger'front panel pad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags inunder the pad covers in the center steering wheel and the passenger's sidpanel above the glove box. The purposeSRS is to provide the vehicle's driver afront passenger with additional protectionused together with the seat belt, in cas

frontal impact.

WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.

All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings to not strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertent

activation and serious injury.o Always wear seat belts when driving orriding in a motor vehicle.

B2

Driver's AirbagCAUTION:

o Because the sensor that activates theSRS airbag is connected with pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbag warn-

ing light on the instrument panel willblink for approximately 6 seconds afterthe ignition key has been turned to the"ON" position, and then it should turnoff.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofSRS airbag system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to "ON" or if itremains illuminated after blinking forapproximately 6 seconds, or if it illumi-nates while the vehicle is being driven,please have an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seat belts andSRS airbag system as soon as possible.

AIRBAG

!

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

32

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 45/253

WARNING:o No objects should be placed over o

the airbag modules on the steering winstrument panel, and the

passenger's panel above the glovbecause any such object could harm if the vehicle is in a crash senough to cause the airbags to d

o If the airbags deploy, they must placed by an authorized Hyundai d

o Do not tamper with or disconnecwiring, or other components of thsystem. Doing so could result in due to accidental firing of the airbaby rendering the SRS inoperative

o Do not install a child restraint systhe front passenger seat positichild restraint system must nevplaced in the front seat. The infachild could be severely injured orby an airbag deployment in caseaccident.

o Do not allow children to ride in thepassanger seat. If older children agers and older) must ride in theseat, make sure they are always prbelted and that the seat is moved ba

far as possible.

B240D01O

Side impact

Rear impact

Rollover

o Front airbags are not intended to deployin side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, airbags will notdeploy in frontal crashes below the de-ployment threshold speed.

o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. If you are sitting too closeto the airbag, it can cause death or seri-ous injury when it inflates.

!WARNING:

!

NOTE:Be sure to read information about the SRSon the labels provided on the backside ofthe sun visor and in the glove box.

WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is designed

to work with, and be supplemental to,the driver's and the passenger's threepoint seat belt systems and is not asubstitute for them. Therefore, your seatbelts must be worn at all times while thevehicle is in motion. The airbags deployonly in certain frontal impact conditionssevere enough to likely cause signifi-cant injury to the vehicle occupants.

o The SRS is designed to deploy theairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis less than 30°from the forward longi-tudinal axis of the vehicle and will notdeploy in side, rear or rollover impacts.Additionally, the airbags will only de-ploy once. Thus, seat belts must be wornat all times.

!

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 46/253

B240B02A-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

- Driver's Airbag Module- Passenger's Airbag Module- Knee Bolster- SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)

The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment.

B240B01L

The SRS service reminder indicator (Sthe instrument panel will blink for about onds after the ignition key is turned to theposition or after the engine is started, afterthe SRI should go out.

The airbag modules are located both center of the steering wheel and in thepassenger's panel above the glove boxWhen the SRSCM detects a considerabpact to the front of the vehicle, it will automadeploy the airbags.

B

Upon deployment, tear seams molded dinto the pad covers will separate undersure from the expansion of the airbags. Fopening of the covers then allows full inflathe airbags.

!o For maximum safety protection in all

types of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear their

seat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy veryrapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

WARNING:

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

34

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 47/253

!CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside the vehicle, do not place itnear the instrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel surface. If there is any leak-age from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or airventilator), it may damage these parts. If theliquid from the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with water immedi-ately.

WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there m

a loud noise and fine dust will bleased throughout the vehicle. Tconditions are normal and are noardous. However, the fine dust gated during airbag deploymentcause skin irritation. Wash your and face thoroughly with lukewarmand a mild soap after an accidewhich the airbags were deployed

B

Passenger's Airbag

!

B240B01O

Passenger's Airbag

A fully inflated airbag in combination with aproperly worn seat belt slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, thus reducing the

risk of head or chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility.

B240B03L

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 48/253

!

B990B04Y-AAT

Side Impact Airbag (If installed)

WARNING:

o The side impact airbag is supplemto the driver's and the passenger'belt systems and is not a substituthem. Therefore your seat belts muworn at all times while the vehiclemotion. The airbags deploy only itain side impact conditions senough to cause significant injury vehicle occupants.

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact

airbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orthe front passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side-impact collisions, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and pointof impact. The side impact airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02Y

Side asenso

!WARNING:

o The SRS can function only when theignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS SRI does not come on, or continu-

ously remains on after flashing for about6 seconds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, or after theengine is started, comes on while driv-ing, the SRS is not working properly. Ifthis occurs, have your vehicle immedi-ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position or remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS SRIto illuminate.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

36

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 49/253

!B240C01O-AAT

SRS Care

o The SRS is virtually maintenance free andthere are no parts you can safely service byyourself. The entire SRS system must beinspected by an authorized Hyundai dealer

in 10 years after the date that the vehicle wasmanufactured.

o Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performed bya qualified Hyundai technician. Improperhandling of the airbag system may result inserious personal injury.

WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint sys

the front passenger seat positioA child restraint system must ne

placed in the front seat. The infababy could be severely injured or by an airbag deployment in caseaccident.

o Modification to SRS components oing, including the addition of any kbadges to the pad covers or motions to the body structure, caversely affect SRS performance anto possible injury.

o For cleaning the airbag pad coveronly a soft, dry cloth or one whic

been moistened with plain watervents or cleaners could adversely the airbag covers and proper dment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over othe airbag modules on the stewheel, instrument panel, and the passenger's panel above the glovbecause any such object could harm if the vehicle is in a crash senough to cause the airbags to i

o If the airbags inflate, they must placed by an authorized Hyundai d

HSM393

WARNING:o For best protection from the side impact

airbag system and to avoid being injuredby the deploying side impact airbag,

both front seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steering wheelat the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.The passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could reduce or pre-

vent the effectiveness of the system.o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.

o Do not use excessive force on the side ofthe seat.

o Do not place any objects over the airbagor between the airbag and yourself.

o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact air baginflates.

o To prevent unexpected deployment of

the side impact air bag that may result inpersonal injury,avoid impact to the sideairbag sensor when the ignition key is on.

!

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 50/253

WARNING:o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS

wiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,

due to accidental firing of the airbags orby rendering the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag system mustbe discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.

o If you sell your vehicle, make certain that

this manual is transferred to the newowner.

o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on the floor, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not replace the bumper or the bumperguard with the one other than the Hyundaigenuine parts. Otherwise, it can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto unexpected injury.

!

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

38 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 51/253

B260A03O-AAT

(2.4L, 2.7L)

B

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 52/253

1. Coolant Temperature Gauge2. Tachometer3. Turn Signal Indicator Light4. High Beam Indicator Light5. Speedometer6. Odometer / Trip Odometer7. Fuel Gauge8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)9. Cruise Indicator (If installed)10. 4WD System Warning Light (If installed)11. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

12. Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag)Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

13. Seat Belt Warning Light14. Tail Gate Open Warning Light15. Door Ajar Warning Light16. Charging System Warning Light17. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed)18. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light19. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)20. Low Fuel Warning Light21. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

40

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 53/253

B265A03O-AAT

(3.5L)

B26

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 54/253

1. Coolant Temperature Gauge2. Tachometer3. Turn Signal Indicator Light4. High Beam Indicator Light5. Speedometer6. Odometer / Trip Odometer7. Fuel Gauge8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)9. Cruise Indicator (If installed)10. 4WD System Warning Light (If installed)

11. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light12. Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag)

Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

13. Seat Belt Warning Light14. Tail Gate Open Warning Light15. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed)16. Door Ajar Warning Light17. Charging System Warning Light18. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light19. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)20. Traction Control Off indicator Light (If installed)21. Low Fuel Warning Light22. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

42 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 55/253

B260B01A-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Service

Reminder Indicator (SRI)

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comeson and flashes for about 6 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" position or afterthe engine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the SRI does not come on,or continuously remains on after flashing forabout 6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have the SRSinspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

B260E02O-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Light

and Chime

The seat belt reminder light blinks until your seatbelt is fastened when the ignition key is turnedfrom the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START" andthe warning chime will sound for 6 seconds.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning

CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning light stawhile the engine is running, serious edamage may result. The oil pressure ing light comes on whenever there is ficient oil pressure. In normal operatshould come on when the ignition sis turned on, then go out when the eis started. If the oil pressure warningstays on while the engine is running,is a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon a

safe to do so, turn off the engine and the oil level. If the oil level is low, fengine oil to the proper level and staengine again. If the light stays on wiengine running, turn the engine off diately. In any instance where the oistays on when the engine is runninengine should be checked by a Hydealer before the car is driven again

!

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 56/253

!

B260H02A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid

Level Warning Light

The brake fluid level warning light indicates thatthe brake fluid level in the brake master cylinderis low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no other trouble isfound, the car should be immediately and care-fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.If further trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken to a dealerby a professional towing service or some othersafe method.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a

distance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.

Warning Light OperationThe parking brake/brake fluid level warning light

should come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out when the parking brake is re-leased.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out whenthe engine starts. If the light comes on at anyother time, you should slow the vehicle and bringit to a complete stop in a safe location off theroadway.

B260J01A-AAT

Charging System Warning

The charging system warning light shouldon when the ignition is turned on, then when the engine is running. If the light st

while the engine is running, there is a mation in the electrical charging system. If thcomes on while you are driving, stop, turnengine and check under the hood. First,certain the generator drive belt is in placecheck the tension of the belt. Do this as on page 6-21 by pushing down on the cethe belt. And then have the system checyour Hyundai dealer.

B260B01B-AAT

Tail Gate Open Warning L

This light remains on unless the tail gcompletely closed and latched.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

44

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 57/253

B260L01Y-AAT

Door Ajar Warning Light

and Chime

The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that the driver's side front door is not

completely closed.

NOTE:To remind you not to lock the key inside thecar, the warning light comes on wheneverthe key is in the "LOCK" position and a dooris open. The warning chime only soundswhenever the key is in the "LOCK" positionand driver's side front door is open. Thechime sounds and the light remains onuntil the key is removed from the ignition.

!

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.

B260N01A-AAT

Malfunction Indicator Light

This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that the

exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and will go out ina few seconds. If it illuminates while driving, ordoes not illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, take your car to yournearest authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked.

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (If installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System indicator will come onand then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRIremains on, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The

normal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

WARNING:If both the ABS SRI and Parking BBrake fluid level warning lights remainor come on while driving, there may

problem with E.B.D. (Electronic BrakeDistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops andyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai as soon as possible.

B260C02O-GAT

Traction Control Indicato

Light (If installed)

The traction control indicator changes tion according to the ignition switch positiowhether or not the system is in operatioIt will also illuminate when the ignition turned to the "ON" position, but should after the engine starts. If the TCS indicatoon, take your car to your authorized Hdealer and have the system checkedsection 2 for more information about the

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 58/253

B270A01O-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SO

The front and rear disc brake pads haveindicators that should make a high-psquealing or scraping noise when new paneeded. The sound may come and go

heard all the time when the vehicle is momay also be heard when the brake pepushed down firmly. Excessive rotor dawill result if the worn pads are not replaceyour Hyundai dealer immediately.

B270B01O-AAT

PARKING START WARNING SOU

If the vehicle driven at over 2mph(3km/h2~3 seconds, the warning chime will

continuously when the parking brake eng

B260T01O-GAT

4WD System Warning Light

(If installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the4WD(Four Wheel Drive) system warning lightwill come on and then go off in a few seconds.

B260Q03O-DAT

Cruise Indicator

(If installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated when the cruise controlON´OFF switch is pushed on the steeringwheel.The indicator light does not illuminate when thecruise control ON´OFF switch is pushed again.Information about the use of cruise control isbeginning on page 1-75.

B265C01O-AAT

Traction Control Indicator

Lights (3.5 L only) (If installed)

The traction control indicators change opera-tion according to the ignition switch position andwhether the system is in operation or not.

They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFFindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the TCS.

CAUTION:If the 4WD system warning light ( ) blinkswhile driving, this indicates that there is amalfunction in the 4WD system. If this oc-curs, have your vehicle checked by an au-thorized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible.

!

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

46 INSTRNMENT CLUSTER

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 59/253

!

B290A02A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeadding coolant to the reservoir.

The needle on the engine coolant tempegauge should stay in the normal range. If it across the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over and ssoon as possible and turn off the engineopen the hood and, after the engine has ccheck the coolant level and the water pumbelt. If you suspect cooling system trouble

your cooling system checked by a Hyundaias soon as possible.

B290A01O

B280A01A-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacity

is given in Section 9.

B280A01O

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 60/253

B310B04E-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

Odometer

Records the total distance the vehicle hasdriven.It is normal for a new vehicle to havodometer indicating less than 30 miles.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the oeter of any vehicle with the intent to cthe number of the odometer. The altemay void your warranty coverage.

B3

B330A03A-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty.

B330A01O

!

B300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-

ters per hour (on the inner scale).

B300A01O

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

48 MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITC

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 61/253

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distancein miles or kilometers.

2,3 Trip odometer

Records the distance of 2 trips in miles orkilometers.TRIP A: first distance you have traveled fromyour origination point to a first destination.TRIP B: Second distance from the first destina-tion to the final destination.

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the resetswitch. When pressed for 1 second, it will reset

to 0.

B300A04O

B300A03O

Reset switch

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,

HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM

SWITCH

Turn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes thsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pupwards on the lever causes the turn signthe right side of the car to blink. As the completed, the lever will automatically rethe center position and turn off the turn sat the same time. If either turn signal indlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes does not blink, or does not go on at all, tha malfunction in the system. Check for a bout fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai de

Function of Digital Odometer/

Trip Odometer

Pushing in the reset switch under the right sideof the speedometer when the ignition switch isturned "ON" displays the following sequence:

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B340D01A AATB340B01A AAT B340C03A AAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 62/253

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, pulever forward (away from you). The HighIndicator Light will come on at the same timlow beams, pull the lever back toward y

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switchtoward you, then release it. The headlighbe flashed even though the headlight swin the "OFF" position.

B

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.

The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.

B340C03A-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-

tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

Parking Light Auto Off

If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" afterdriving, the parking lights will automatically shut

"OFF" when the driver's door is opened.To turn them "ON" again, you must simply turnthe ignition key to the "ON" position.

HSM039 HSM037

RIGHT

LEFT

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

50 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

B340G01L GAT B350A01A AAT B350B01O GAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 63/253

B340G01L-GAT

Auto Light (If installed)

To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If

you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illumination.

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

HSM294

B350A01O-A

(1)

(2)

(3)

B350B01O-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull the washer lever toward the steering wheel.

the washer lever is operated, the wipersmatically make two passes across theshield. The washer continues to operatthe lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more th

seconds at a time or when thereservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be suwiper blades are not frozen to theprior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in wuse windshield washer antifreeze

B350

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B390A01O-GATB350C01O-AATMi t Wi O ti

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 64/253

B390A01O GAT

Tail Gate Wiper And Washer Switc

1. : The washer fluid will be sprayethe rear window and the wiper op

while the rear window wiper baplaced in this position.

2.OFF3.INT : To use the intermittent wiper fe

place the rear window wiper barre"INT" position.

4.ON : When the point indicate "ON", thwindow wiper operates continu

B35

B350C01O AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position. With the

switch in this position, the interval betweenwipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.It also can be varied by vehicle speeds withinsame time.

B350B02O-AB350C01O-A

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired in mist, push thewindshield wiper and washer control lever up-

wards.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

52 HAZARD WARNING SYSTEMFRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B370A01A-AATB360A04A-AAT B380A01Y-AAT

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

SWITCH

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 65/253

3 0 0

The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must make

such an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.

HSM034

360 0

(If installed)

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.They will light when the headlight switch is in the

second position and the ignition key is in the"ON" position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights will be turned off.

HSM289

380 0

The rear window defroster and heated orearview mirrors are turned on by pushingswitch. To turn the defroster off, push the

a second time. The rear window deautomatically turns itself off after about 1utes. To restart the defroster cycle, pushswitch again after it has turned itself off

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

DIGITAL CALENDARDIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01A-AAT B400B02O-GAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 66/253

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the rear window defroster to operate.

There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" tofacilitate resetting the clock to the correct time.When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29changes the readout to 12 : 00.

(If installed)

How to adjust the date & the time

1. Whenever "M" button is pushed, the "Y"MONTH", "DAY", "HOUR" and "MINblinks in order.

2. Adjust the date & the time by p" (UP)", " (DOWN)" button whyear/month/day/hour/minute each b

3. After adjusting the date & the time, pubutton once more and the adjustmcompleted.

NOTE:When the battery has been reconnec

charged, set the date and time as descabove. However, the first display moset on DEC 01.

HSM100

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove foreigndeposits from the inner surface of the glassas this may cause damage to the defrosterelements.

!

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

54 POWER OUTLET

B500D08O-AAT

CIGARETTE LIGHTERINSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT

CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B420A01A-AATB410A01A-AAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 67/253

(If installed)

These are located in the quarter trim and center facia panel.

These supply 12V electric power to oelectric accessories or equipment onlythe key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position

! CAUTION:Do not use the power outlet to coelectric accessories or equipment than those designed to operate on 12

BFor the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way

into its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

B420A01O

The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.

B410A01O

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B430A01A-GAT B440A01E-AAT

ASHTRAY DRINK HOLDER

B450A02O-AAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 68/253

Front Ashtray

The front ashtray may be opened by pulling it outby its grip. To remove the ashtray to empty or

clean it, press down on the spring-loaded tabinside the ashtray and pull i t all the way out. Theashtray light will only illuminate when the exter-nal lights are on.

B430A01O

Rear Ashtray

The rear ashtray may be opened by pulling it outby its top edge. To remove the ashtray to empty

or clean it, press down on the spring-loaded tabinside the ashtray and lift the ashtray upwardand pull it all the way out.

B440A01O

!

Front Drink Holder

The front drink holder is located on theconsole and may be used for holding c

cans.

WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink

ers. A spilled beverage that is vecan injure you or your passengers. Sliquids can damage interior trimelectrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cucans in the drink holder. The objecbe thrown out in the event of a sustop or an accident, possibly inthe passengers in the vehicle.

B

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

56 SUNROOF

B460A01Y-AAT

(If i ll d)B450B02O-AAT

R D i k H ld (If i ll d)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 69/253

!

(If installed)

Sun Shade

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slidinshade which you can manually adjust tolight with the sunroof closed, or to block su

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while dr

B

!Rear Drink Holder (If installed)

The rear drink holder is located on the rear mainconsole and may be used for holding cups. The

rear drink holder can be used by pushing andpulling it at its top edge.

CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed positionwhen not in use.

WARNING:Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. The objects can bethrown out in the event of a sudden stop oran accident, possibly injuring the passen-gers in the vehicle.

B450B01O

!

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B460B01GK-GAT

O i th S f S tB460C01S-AAT

Tilti th S f S t

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 70/253

CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperature or when it is covered withice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that may

have accumulated on the guide rails.

!

!Opening the Sunroof System

The sunroof can be electrically opened or closedwith the ignition key in the "ON" position. The

sunroof is moved to its fully open position bypushing the "OPEN" switch, and to stop at thedesired position, push in any switches (OPEN,CLOSE, UP, DOWN).To close, press and hold the "CLOSE" button.Release the button when the sunroof reachesthe desired position.

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,

arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.

B460B01O

Tilting the Sunroof System

The sunroof can be tilted by pushing thebutton with sunroof closed. Release the

when the sunroof reaches the desired poTo close the sunroof, press the "DOWNton.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there isbe sure to wipe off any water that is osunroof before operating it.

B4

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

58

B460D01O-GAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 71/253

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench prwith the vehicle into the socket. This wcan be found in the vehicle's glove

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or

terclockwise to close.

B4

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically operate:

1. Open the spectacle case.

2. Turn the hexagonal bolts counterclockwiseto remove the overhead console with asocket wrench.

B460D01O

B460D02O

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

INTERIOR LIGHT

B490A03Y-AAT

Interior LightB480B01O-AAT

Map Lighto ON

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 72/253

Interior Light

The interior courtesy light has three buttons.The three buttons are:

o DOORIn the " DOOR " position, the interior courtesylight comes on when any door is opened regard-less of the ignition key position. The light goesout gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.

B490A01O

Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn the light onor off. This light produces a spot beam for

convenient use as a map light at night or as apersonal light for the driver and the passenger.

HSM046

With Sunroof Without Sunroof

In the "ON" position, the light stays ontimes.

!CAUTION

Do not leave this button pressed fextended period of time when the vehnot running.

o OFFIn the "OFF" position, the light stays oftimes even though a door is open.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

60 GLOVE BOXSPECTACLE CASE

B500A01S-AATB491A02O-GAT

(If Installed)B500B01O-AAT

IlluminatedGloveBox

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 73/253

!WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.

o To open the glove box, pull on the glove boxrelease lever.

o The glove box door can be locked (andunlocked) with the key.

B500A01O

UNLOCK LOCK

!

(If Installed)

HSM170

The spectacle case is located on the frontoverhead console.

Push the end of the cover to open the spectaclecase.

WARNING:Do not keep objects such as sharp or un-suitable things inside the spectacle case.Such objects can be thrown out in the eventof a sudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the vehicle.

With Sunroof Without Sunroof

Illuminated Glove Box

Opening the glove box will automatically tthe light when the multi-function switch is to the first/second position.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B510A01A-AAT

Manual Type

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

!B510B01Y-AAT

Electric Type (If installed)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 74/253

Manual Type

The outside rearview mirrors are equipped witha remote control for your convenience. It is

operated by the control lever in the bottom frontcorner of the window.Before driving away, always check that yourmirrors are positioned so you can see behindyou, both to the left and right sides, as well asdirectly behind your vehicle. When using themirror, always exercise caution when attempt-ing to judge the distance of vehicles behind oralong side of you.

B510A01O

CAUTION:If the mirror control is jammed with ice, donot attempt to break it free using the controlhandle or by manipulating the face of themirror. Use an approved spray de-icer (not

radiator antifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.

!

The outside rearview mirrors can be adto your preferred rear vision, both direc

hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the leright sides.The remote control outside rearview switch controls the adjustments for botand left outside mirrors.

Electric Type (If installed)

B51

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

62

B510D01Y-AAT

OUTSIDEREARVIEWMIRRORHEA!

To adjust the position of either mirror:

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 75/253

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEA

(If installed)

The outside rearview mirror heater is ac

in connection with the rear window defrosheat the outside rearview mirror glass, pthe switch for the rear window defrosterearview mirror glass will be heated for ding or defogging and will give you improvevision in inclement weather conditions. Puswitch again to turn the heater off. The orearview mirror heater automatically turnoff after 15 minutes.

!WARNING:

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rear view mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface. Any objects seen inthis mirror are closer than they appear.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To remove

any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved de-icer.

!

B510B02O

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or leftto activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appro-priate perimeter switch as illustrated.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW

MIRROR

B510C01A-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWB520A01A-AAT

Manual TypeB520B01O-GAT

Electric Type (If installed)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 76/253

!

MIRRORS

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push them

toward the rear.The outside rearview mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and an acci-dent which could cause death, serious in-

jury or property damage.

yp

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderearview mirror. The "night" position is selected

by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.

B510C01O

B520A01O

yp ( )

The electric type day/night inside rearvieror controls automatically the glare of hea

of the car behind you. Adjust the rearviewto the desired position.

B5

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

64

HOMELINK PROGRAMMING

HOMELINK MIRROR

B520C01L-GAT

(If installed)Automatic-Dimming Function

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 77/253

!

! CAUTION:o Make sure people and/or objects a

of the way of any garage doors or

you may be operating during thegramming procedures.o Keep original transmitters for po

future programming needs, or inyou sell the vehicle.

o In the event you do sell your vehicrecommended you erase yourgrammed HomeLink mirror butto

WARNING:Do not use HomeLink with any garageopener that lacks the safety stop averse feature as required by federal standards (includes garage doors factured before April 1, 1982), as doors can increase the risk of seriousor death. Call 1-800-355-3515 orwww.homelink.com for more inform

Indicator Light

( )

Your new vehicle may be equipped with anautomatic night vision mirror. During nighttime

driving, this feature will automatically detect andreduce dangerous rearview mirror glare.

Your new mirror also comes with an integratedHomeLink Universal Transceiver, which allowsyou to program up to 3 buttons on the mirror toactivate your garage door(s), estate gate, homelighting, etc. The mirror actually learns thecodes from your various existing transmitters.

To assist you during nighttime driving, yourmirror will automatically dim upon detectingglare from the vehicles behind you.

Press the button to turn the automatic-dimming function off. The mirror indicator lightwill turn off.

Press the button to turn the automatic-dimming function on. The mirror indicator lightwill illuminate.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "on" position

each time the vehicle is started.

B520C01LB520C01L

Glare Detection

Homelink buttonsAutomatic-dimming mirrorfunction buttons

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

NOTE:If programming a garage door opener or

1. When programming the buttons for the firsttime, press and hold the two outside

3. If the garage door opener or other devwish to program is rolling-code equ

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 78/253

p g g g g pgate, it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the "cycling" process to preventpossible motor burnout.

ProgrammingEnsure the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC"position to program and/or operate HomeLinksystem. It is also recommended that a newbattery be placed in the handheld transmitter ofthe device being programmed to HomeLink forquicker programming and accurate transmis-sion of the radio-frequency.Follow these steps to program your HomeLinkmirror:

HomeLink buttons ( , ), releasing whenthe indicator light begins to flash (approxi-mately 20 seconds). This procedure erasesthe factory-set default codes. Do not per-form this step when programming additional

transmitters.

B520C02L

Flashing

Flashing

2. Hold the transmitter of the device you wantto program 1 to 3 inches away from thebottom of the mirror. Simultaneously pressthe handheld transmitter button and theHomeLink button you wish to program. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first, thenrapidly, indicating successful programming.

B520C03L

Transmitter

  1  ~   3    i  n  c   h

  e  s

Additional Programming for RollingDevices

For any rolling-code-equipped device; the steps additional below after completi"Programming" section. A second persomake the following steps easier.

1. Locate the "learn" or "smart" button device's motor head unit. The exact loand color of the button varies by pbrand, but is usually referenced in the downer's manual. Contact HomeLink800-355-3515 or www.homelink.cohelp.

2. Press and release the "learn" or "button on the device's motor head u

NOTE:You now have 30 seconds to initiate s

proceed to the "Rolling Code Programsection.

4. Repeat step 2 to program the remHomeLink buttons.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

66

Reprogramming a Single Hom

Button

Erasing Programmed Buttons3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press andrelease the programmed HomeLink button.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 79/253

Button

To program a device to HomeLink usHomeLink button previously trained, followsteps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinton. Do not release until step 4 hascompleted.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash(after 20 seconds), hold the handheldmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the botthe mirror.

3. Press and hold the transmitter buttonnecessary, press and "cycle," as desin the '"Gate Operator & Canadian Proming" portion of this text).

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash

at first, then rapidly, indicating succprogramming. Release both buttons

Operating HomeLink

Simply press the appropriate HomeLink buttonto activate the trained product (garage door,security system, entry door lock, estate gate,

lighting, etc.). The original handheld transmit-ters may also be used at any time.

To erase the three HomeLink buttons, pressand hold the two outside buttons until the indica-tor light begins to flash (after 20 seconds).Release both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but can bereprogrammed.

B520C02L

Flashing

Press and release the same HomeLink but-ton a second time to complete the program-ming process. (Some devices may requireyou to press and release a third time tocomplete the programming.)

4. Now HomeLink mirror and rolling-code-equipped device should be synchronized.The remaining HomeLink buttons may nowbe programmed if this has not been donepreviously.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

PARKING BRAKE

Gate Operator Programming & Cana-

dian Programming

B530A01A-AAT

TAIL GATE

B540A01FC-AAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 80/253

dian Programming

During programming, your handheld transmit-ter may automatically stop transmitting.Continue to press and hold the HomeLink buttonwhile you press and repress ("cycle") your

handheld transmitter every two seconds untilthe frequency signal has been learned. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly upon successful programming.

Accessories

For more information on HomeLink andHomeLink-compatible products, or to purchaseHomeLink accessories, call 1-800-355-3515or visit www.homeink.com.

Always engage the parking brake before leav-ing the car. This also turns on the parking brakeindicator light when the key is in the "ON" or"START" position. Before driving away, be surethat the parking brake is fully released and theindicator light is off.

o To engage the parking brake, pull the leverup as far as possible.

o To release the parking brake, pull up andpress the thumb button. Then, while holdingthe button in, lower the brake lever.

B530A01O

!WARNING:

The tail gate should always be keptpletely closed while the vehicle is in mIf it is left open or ajar, poisonous exgases may enter the car resulting in seillness or death to the occupants. Seetional warnings concerning exhaust on page 2-2.

B

o The tail gate can be locked or unlockea key.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

68

o To close the tail gate window, lower the tailgate window, and it will close by itself.T b th t il t i d i l

o The tail gate is opened by pulling the outsidehandle up, raising the tail gate manually.T l l th t il t th d

B540C01HP-GAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGH

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 81/253

To be sure the tail gate window is securelyfastened, always try to pull it up again.

NOTE:The tail gate window lock is operated is in

connection with the tail gate lock. To openthe tail gate window make sure the tail gateis unlocked with a key or the central doorlocking switch.

o To close, lower the tail gate, then press downon it until it is closed. To be sure the tail gateis fully closed, always try to pull it up againwithout using the outside handle.

B540B02O-AAT

Tail gate Window

B540B01O

o When you push the tail gate window releasebutton to open the tail gate window, it willspring up slightly.Raise the tail gate window. The window willraise completly by itself after it has been

raised halfway.

Luggage compartment light has a 3-pswitch. The three positions are:

o In the "MIDDLE" position, the luggagpartment light comes on when the tail opened, then goes out when it is clo

o In the "ON" position, the light stays otimes.

o In the "OFF" position, the light stays otimes.

B5

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B540D02O-AAT

LUGGAGE NETB640A01S-AAT

CARGO SECURITY SCREEN

(Ifi t ll d) !

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 82/253

When loading the objects in the luggagepartment, use the four rings located

luggage compartment to attach the luggaas shown illustration. This will help preveobjects from sliding.

(If installed)

B640A01O

To use the security screen, pull it out of the

retractor and hook it to the anchors as illus-trated.

B650A01S-AAT

Stowage Precautions

1. Do not place objects on the cargo security

screen. Such objects may be thrown aboutinside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicleoccupants during an accident or when brak-ing.

2. For better fuel economy, do not carry unnec-essary weight.

3. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggagecompartment. It is designed for luggageonly.

4. Try to maintain the balance of the vehicle andlocate the weight as far forward as possible.

!

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

70 ROOF RACK

B630A02B-AAT

(If installed)

CAUTION!! CAUTION:

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 83/253

If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. Crossrails andfixing components to adapt the roof rack on yourvehicle may be obtained from an authorizedHyundai dealer.

B630A01O

CAUTION:o In case the sunroof is equipped, d

position roof rack loads that couldfere with opening of the sunroof.

o The following specifications are r

mended when loading cargo or lug

75 lbs (34 kg) EveDistributed

o Loading cargo or luggage above (34 kg) on the roof rack may damagvehicle.When you carry large objects, nevthem hang over the rear or the sidyour vehicle.

o To prevent damage or loss of car

you are driving, check frequently tosure the luggage carrier and cargstill securely fastened.

o Always drive your vehicle at a mospeed.

o To use the roof rails as a roof racmust fit the roof rails with two orcrossrails or equivalent before cacargo or luggage on the roof.

o Loading cargo or luggage over scation on the roof rack may dastability of your vehicle.

ROOF RACK

!! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when carryingfragile or bulky objects in the luggage com-partment.

! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. Theluggage net ALWAYS keep your face andbody out of its recoil path. DO NOT usewhen the strap has visible signs of wear ordamage.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEAAUTO FUEL CUT SWITCHHIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01A-AAT

(If installed)B560B01O-AAT B560A02S-AAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 84/253

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstoplight in the center of the rear window alsolights when the brakes are applied.

B550A01O

!

The auto fuel cut switch is located on the driver'sside of the engine compartment.In the event of a collision or sudden impact, theauto fuel cut device cuts off the fuel supply. If this

device is activated, it must be reset by pressingin on the top of the switch before the engine canbe restarted.

WARNING:Before resetting the auto fuel cut switch,the fuel line should be checked for fuelleaks.

B560B01O

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from insvehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid olocated on the front floor area on the left the car.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open becauhas formed around it, tap lightly or puthe lid to break the ice and release the lnot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray athe lid with an approved de-icer flunot use radiator anti-freeze) or movvehicle to a warm place and allow themelt.

B5

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

72 HOOD RELEASE

!B570A01L-GAT

WARNING:

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 85/253

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the

WARNING:o If you open the fuel filler cap during high

ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern.

Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replacedand securely seated after fueling. Failureto replace or fully seat the fuel filler capwill result in fuel vapors escaping intothe atmosphere and the check engine"MIL" indicator illuminating.

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.

B5

B

!WARNING:

o The fuel cap must be tightened at least

3 clicks, otherwise " " light willilluminate.

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Beforerefueling, always stop the engine andnever allow sparks or open flames nearthe filler area. If you need to replace thefiller cap, use a genuine Hyundai re-placement part.

B560A02O-1

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

SUN VISORFLOOR MAT ANCHOR

2. Push the secondary latch lever up and lift thehood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.

B580A01L-AATB571A03Y-AAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 86/253

! WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldopen while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or be

damaged.

y

When closing the hood, slowly close the hoodand make sure it locks into place.

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors the driver and front passenger either frosideward shade. To reduce glare or to shdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor

A vanity mirrors are provided on the backsun visor for the driver and front passe

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System label containing useful information cfound on the back of each sun visor

B

Vanity mirror

!

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed

on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slipsand interferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, It may cause anaccident.

o Don't put an additional floor mat on thetop of the fixed mat, otherwise the addi-tional mat may slide forward and inter-fere with the movement of the pedals.

HXGS263

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

74 FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING

LIGHT

STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER

B620A01S-AATB600A02Y-AAT

!WARNING:

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 87/253

!

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever upward and hold it to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.3. After adjustment, release the lever.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and serious injury ordeath.

A red light comes on when the front dopened. The purpose of this light is to when you get in or out and also to warn pvehicles.

B620A01

B580B01O-AAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If installed)

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automati-cally turn on the mirror light when the multi-function switch is turned to the first/secondposition.

B600A01O

WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

CRUISE CONTROLREAR SEAT ARM RESTHORN

B611A01Y-AATB610A01L-GAT B660A01S-AAT

(If installed)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 88/253

This arm rest is located in the center of the rearseat back.

B611A01O-A

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.

B610A01O

The cruise control system provides autspeed control for your comfort when drivfreeways, tollroads, or other nonconghighways. This system is designed to fuabove approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)

B

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

76

B660B03O-AAT

To Set the Cruise SpeedB660C02O-AAT

To cancel the cruise speed5. To increase speed, temporarily depress the

accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle toexceed the preset speed. When you remove

f f h l d l h

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 89/253

1. Push the cruise control ON´OFF button.The "CRUISE" indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will illuminate. This turns thesystem on.

2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed above25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Push the "SET" (COAST) button after youhave set the vehicle speed at the desiredspeed.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.

B660B01O

To disengage the cruise control systemthe "CANCEL" button.Additionally, the following actions will disethe system:

o Depress the brake pedal.o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual trano Shift the selector lever to "N" positio

(Automatic transaxle).o Decrease the vehicle speed lower th

memory speed by 12 mph (20 km/ho Decrease the vehicle speed to less t

mph (40 km/h).o Release the "MAIN" button.

B

your foot from the accelerator pedal, thevehicle will return to the speed you have set.

NOTE:If the vehicle speed decreases more than 12mph (20 km/h) below the set speed ordecreases below 25 mph (40 km/h), thecruise control system will automaticallycancel the set speed.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

!WARNING:

B660F02O-AAT

To Reset at a Slower SpeedB660D01O-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 90/253

o Keep the main switch off when notthe cruise control.

o Use the cruise control system onlytraveling on open highways in

weather.o Do not use the cruise control w

may not be safe to keep the caconstant speed, for instance, drivheavy or varying traffic, or on sli(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or wiroads or over 6% up-hill or dowroads.

o Pay particular attention to the dconditions whenever using the control system.

o During cruise-control driving w

manual transaxle vehicle, do notinto neutral without depressinclutch pedal, or the engine woverrevved. If this happens, depreclutch pedal or release the main s

o During normal cruise control operwhen the "SET" button is activatreactivated after applying the bthe cruise control will energizeapproximately 3 seconds. This denormal.

1. Push the "SET (COAST)" button and hold it.While the control button is pushed, the ve-hicle speed will gradually decrease.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control button.

B660B01O

The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push the"RESUME (ACCEL)" button, providing the ve-

hicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660E01Y-AAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the "RESUME (ACCEL)" button andhold it.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the"RESUME (ACCEL)" switch. While the con-trol switch is held, the vehicle will graduallygain speed.

B660D01O

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

78 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01O-GAT

(If installed)B710B02O-AAT

Center Ventilator

The center ventilators are located in the 1 2 3 4 12

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 91/253

HSM417

1. Side Ventilator2. Side Defroster Nozzle3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator

of the dashboard. To change the directionair flow, move the knob in the center of thup-and-down and side-to-side. The venopened when the vent knob is moved to "

position. The vents are closed when thknob is moved to " ". Keep these ventof any obstructions.

B710C02O-AAT

Side Ventilator

The side ventilators are located on each the front door. To change the direction offlow, move the knob in the center of the ve

and-down and side-to-side. The venopened when the vent knob is moved toposition. The vents are closed when thknob is moved to " ". Keep these ventof any obstructions.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670C02O-AAT

Air Intake Control SwitchB670B01O-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)B670A03O-AAT

(If installed)

1 2

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 92/253

This is used to select fresh outside recirculating inside air.

FreshRecirculation

With the " " mode selected, air entevehicle from outside and is heated or according to the other functions selectWith the " " mode selected, air fromthe passenger compartment is drawn ththe heating system and heated or coolcording to the other functions selected.

This is used to select the blower fan speed.The blower fan speed, and therefore the volumeof air delivered from the system, may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower controlbetween the "1" and "4" position.

B670B01O-1 B6

There are three controls and two switches forthe heating and cooling system. They are:

1. Air intake control switch2. Air conditioning switch3. Air flow control4. Fan speed control5. Temperature control

B690A01O-1

1 2

3 4 5

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

80

B670D03O-AAT

Air Flow ControlNOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in " " modewill give rise to fogging of the wind

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 93/253

This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and todirect the flow of air. Air can be directed to thefloor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five

symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside ofthe vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used toturn the blower fan off.

B670D01O-1

B

will give rise to fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition prolonged useof the air conditioning with the " "mode selected may result in the air withinthe passenger compartment becomingexcessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control switch will changeto " " mode in floor, floor-defrost anddefrost position. This is normal opera-tion. But, the air intake control switchwill change to " " mode when theignition switch is turned "ON" with theMAX A/C mode selected.

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause aidischarged through the face level vents

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 94/253

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and thefloor vents. This makes it possible to have

cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmerair from the floor outlets at the same time.

B670D03O

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshiefroster nozzle, the floor vents, side de

nozzle and side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, thwill turn on automatically and "Fresh" mobe activated.

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle

and side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.

HSM118

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

82

mode except the defrost mode and thefloor-defrost mode. Although the A/Cswitch indicator is turned off, this is normaloperation.

NOTE:o The air intake control switch will c

to " " mode when the ignition sis turned "ON" with the MAX A/C

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 95/253

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turnon automatically and "Fresh" mode will be ac-tivated to improve windshield defrosting.

NOTE:If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode isselected, the air conditioning will not turnoff by pushing the A/C button.If the air flow control is set to the defrost orthe floor-defrost mode, the A/C will be onautomatically and the A/C will not off until

the air flow control is set to the another

HSM120

MAX A/C-Level

Air is discharged through the face level vents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Recirculation" modewill be activated.

MAXA/C

HSM428

* The A/C or the air intake control returns to its former setting.

A/C

ON

ON or OFF *

OF F

ON or OFF *

ON

ON

Air Intak

Control Sw

or

OF F

p is turned ON with the MAX A/C selected.

o When you change to another modeMAX A/C, the A/C and the air control switch are set to the follchart.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

HEATING CONTROLS

B690A01O-AATB670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 96/253

For normal heating operation, set the acontrol to the floor ( ) position. (The "mode will be activated.)

For faster heating, the air intake control should be set in the recirculate ( ) po

If the windows fog up, set the air flow conthe defrost ( ) position (The A/C will tautomatically and "Fresh" mode will bvated.)

For maximum heat, move the temperaturtrol to "Warm".

B69

This control is used to adjust the degree ofheating or cooling desired.

B670E01O

Cool WarmB670D07O

OFF Off-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.

NOTE:If the air flow control is off, the air intakecontrol is set to the fresh mode automati-cally.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

84 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMVENTILATIONBI-LEVEL HEATING

B710A01O-AATB700A01O-AAT B740A01S-AAT

(If installed)

Air Conditioning Switch

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 97/253

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.

o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the airflow control to the face ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols. This makes it possible to have coolerair from the dashboard vents and warmer airfrom the floor outlets at the same time. To use

this feature:

o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B700A01O-1 B710A01O-1

The air conditioning is turned on or

pushing the A/C button on the heating/aditioning control panel.

B7

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)

B740C02O-AAT

De-Humidified HeatingB740B03O-AAT

Air Conditioning Operation

Cooling

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 98/253

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the recirculate ( ) position on the

air intake control switch.

For dehumidified heating:

o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) po

o Turn on the air conditioning switch. Tconditioning indicator light should comthe same time.

o Set the air intake control switch to thair ( ) position.

o Adjust the fan control to the desired o For more rapid action, set the fan at

the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to prov

desired amount of warmth.

B74

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position.o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-

ing in on the switch. The air conditioningindicator light should come on at the sametime.

o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.

B740B01O-1

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

86

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilation sys-

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 99/253

entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake controlswitch to the position.Be sure to return the control switch to

the position when the irritation haspassed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. Thiswill help keep the driver alert and comfort-able.

o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawnin through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these arenot blocked by leaves, snow, ice or otherobstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, setthe air intake control switch to the fresh air( ) position, fan speed to the desired

position, turn on the air conditioning system,and adjust temperature control to desiredtemperature.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B720A02E-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

Manual A/C Full automatic A/C Manual A/C Full automatic A/C

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 100/253

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield;

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (TheA/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode wactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to on the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed coto the low position.

B720A02O-1 B720

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

88 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automaticheating and cooling control system controlled

B970B01O-AAT

Heating and Cooling Controls1 2 3 4 5

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 101/253

g g yby simply setting the desired temperature.

1. Temperature Control Button2. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch3. Display Window

4. Air Flow Control Switch5. Blower Fan Speed Control Switch

6. OFF Switch7. Air Conditioning Switch8. Air Intake Control Switch

9. Defroster Switch10. Ambient Temperature Switch

B6 7 8 9 10

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B970C01O-GAT

Automatic OperationNOTE:If the battery has been discharged oconnected, the temperature mode wilto Fahrenheit degree.This is a normal condition and yo

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 102/253

This is a normal condition and yoadjust the temperature mode from Faheit to Centigrade as follows;Press the TEMP down ( ) button 3 se

or more with the AMB button held The display shows that the unit of temture is adjusted to Fahrenheit or Centi(°F →→→→→ °C or °C →→→→→ °F).

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls the heatingand cooling by doing as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator lightwill come on confirming that the Face, Floorand/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blowerspeed and, the air conditioning will operate ifambient temperature is higher than 32°F(0°C) and automatically turns off if the ambi-ent temperature drops below 32°F(0°C).

NOTE:Never place things on the sensor whlocated in the car on the instrument to ensure better control of the heatin

cooling system.

B970C01O

Photo sensor

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desiredtemperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum "HI" by pushing on the button. Eachpush of the button will cause the temperature

to increase by 1°F(0.5°C).The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum "LO" by pushing on the button. Eachpush of the button will cause the temperatureto decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).

B970C03O

 

1

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

90

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed ControlB670C02S-AAT

Air Intake Control SwitchB995A01O-GAT

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCH

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 103/253

The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby pressing the appropriate fan speed controlbutton. The higher the fan speed is, the more air

is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns offthe fan.

This is used to select fresh outside recirculation inside air.To change the air intake control mode,

mode, Recirculation mode) push the cbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator lightbutton goes off when the air intake contrfresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indlight on the button is illuminated when tintake control is in recirculation mode.

B6B980B01O

Pressing the "AMB" button displays the ambienttemperature on display window.

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well as by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. At this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.

B995A01O

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System OffB980E01O-AAT

Air Flow Control

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 104/253

With the Recirculation mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in "recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode selected may result inthe air within the passenger compart-ment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to"FRESH" mode (regardless of the switchposition). This is normal operation. Theair intake control operates in "AUTO"mode when turning the ignition to the"ON" position if the "AUTO" mode wasused before shutting off the engine.

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air cdirected to the floor, dashboard outlewindshield. Four symbols are used to rep

Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrostion.

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.

B980D01O

 

1

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

92

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 105/253

Floor-LevelWhen selecting the "Floor-Level", the inlight will come on and the air will be dischthrough the floor vents, windshield de

nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side vtor.

B670D03O

Bi-LevelWhen selecting the "Bi-Level", the indicator lightwill come on and the air will be dischargedthrough the face vents and the floor vents. This

makes it possible to have cooler air from thedashboard vents and warmer air from the flooroutlets at the same time.

Face-LevelWhen selecting the "Face-Level", the indicatorlight will come on, causing air to be dischargedthrough the face level vents.

B670D02O

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B980F02O-AAT

Defrost SwitchB740D01Y-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when yoget in, open the windows for a few mto expel the hot air

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 106/253

B980F01O

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the "Fresh"mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-

froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning willoperate if ambient temperature is higher than32°F(0°C) and automatically turns off if theambient temperature drops below 32°F(0°C).

to expel the hot air.o When you are using the air condi

system, keep all windows closed to keair out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffto a lower gear. This increases engine swhich in turn increases the speed of conditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air conditionto avoid the possibility of the engineheating.

o During winter months or in periods whair conditioning is not used regularly, rair conditioning once every month forminutes. This will help circulate the

cants and keep your system in peakating condition.

Floor-Defrost LevelWhen selecting the "Floor-Defrost Level", theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defroster

nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.

HSM119

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

94 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio WorksIonosphere

AM reception

Mountains Unobstr

FM radio station

Ionosphere

FM reception

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 107/253

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna on

your car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frecies and do not bend to follow the esurface. Because of this, FM broadcasterally begin to fade at short distances frostation. Also, FM signals are easily affec

buildings, mountains, or other obstruThese can result in certain listening conwhich might lead you to believe a problemwith your radio. The following conditionormal and do not indicate radio trouble

B750A02L

Buildings

B

B750A01L

Obstructed areaIron bridges

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

B750B03Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way

When a cellular phone is used inside the vnoise may be produced from the audio ment This does not mean that someth

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 108/253

!

o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, select

another station with a stronger signal.o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.

ment. This does not mean that somethwrong with the audio equipment. In such ause the cellular phone at a place as possible from the audio equipment.

WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when yodriving. Stop at a safe place to use a cephone.

B750A04L B750A05L

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

96 AUDIO SYSTEM

H260A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

4. SCAN Button

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 109/253

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob

H2. FADER Control Knob

5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

6. BAND Selector

7. PRESET Button

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

H260B04O-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press theknob to switch the power on. The LCD shows

3. BASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired bass tone.

TREB (Treble Control) Knob

SEEK Operation

(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 more. Releasing it will automatically tune

il bl i i h b d

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 110/253

pthe radio frequency in the radio mode or the CDtrack indicator in the CD mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

BALANCE Control

Pull and turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize right speaker sound (left speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speaker soundwill be attenuated).

2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Turn the control knob counterclockwise toemphasize front speaker sound (rear speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned clockwise, rear speaker soundwill be emphasized (front speaker sound will be

attenuated).

TREB (Treble Control) Knob

Pull the bass control knob further out.

Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

4. SCAN Button

When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.

5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. Press either buttonand hold down to continuously scroll.Release button once the desired station isreached.

next available station with a beep soundWhen the ( ) side is pressed longer thsecond, releasing will automatically tune

next higher frequency and when the ( ) pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasiautomatically tune to the next lower freq

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AMand FM2 bands. The mode selected played on LCD.

7. PRESET STATION SELECT But

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 retively can be preset in the electronic mcircuit on this unit.

FM/AM

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

98

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons you may

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 111/253

one of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1 or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek, scan or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored into

the memory.You should then release the button, andproceed to program the next desired station.A total of 18 stations can be programmed byselecting one AM and two FM stations perbutton.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

nism may be damaged if you spill them.o Do not impact on the audio system, or

the audio system mechanism could be

damaged.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

H260B01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

4. SCAN Button

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 112/253

1. Playing CD

H

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

5. REPEAT Button

6. EJECT Button

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

100

B260D04O-AAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation.Wh di i i h CD d k if

4. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.when you have reached the desired track.

NOTE:o If the CD does not operate proper

the ER2 fault code is displayed, usof two methods to reset the CDfunction.- Remove the audio fuse for 5 mi

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 113/253

o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you pressthe CD button, the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio is being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWNo The desired track on the disc currently being

played can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beg-inning of the next track. Press once toskip back to the beginning of the track.

y

5. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel ,press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

6. EJECT Button

When the EJECT button is pressed with a

CD loaded, the CD will eject.

Remove the audio fuse for 5 miThen, reinstall the audio fuse.

- Diconnect the negative terminal

battery and wait 5 minutes. Thconnect the negative battery ter

o To assure proper operation of thekeep the vehicle interior tempewithin a normal range by usinvehicle's air conditioning or hesystem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace a fuse having the correct capacity

o The preset station frequencies aerased when the car battery is dnected. Therefore, all data will have

set again if this should occur.o Do not add any oil to the rotating

Keep magnets, screwdrivers and metallic objects away from themechanism and head.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 114/253

y po When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set low

enough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.o Do not expose this equipment (includ-

ing the speakers) to water or excessivemoisture.

unit may occur.o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit may

occur.o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

102

B890A02O-AAT

AUDIO FAULT CODE

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system CD mode, find the cause in the chart below.If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

SOLUTIONINDICATION CAUSE

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 115/253

SOLUTION

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Then insert a normal CD disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

INDICATION

Er2

Er3

Er6

CAUSE

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

FOCUS ERROR

DATA READ ERROR

DISC ERROR

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

D285A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 116/253

6. AUDIO Knob(Bass/Treble)

1. POWER ON•OFF,VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. RADIO STATIONControl Knob

4. SEEK/SCAN Butt

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

5. PRESET STATIOSelect Button

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

104

D285B02O-AAT

1. POWER ON•OFF Control Knob

Press this knob to turn the system on and off.

VOLUME Control

SCAN

Press and hold one of the arrows for more thantwo seconds. The radio will produce one beep.The radio will produce one beep. The radio willscan to each stations, play for a few seconds,th t th t t ti P f th

5. Press and hold one of the six numpushbuttons. The radio will producbeep. Whenever you press that numpushbutton, the station you set will and the bass and treble equalization thselected will also be automatically sef h hb

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 117/253

Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume.Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

2. BAND Select Button

Press this button to switch between AM, FM1and FM2. The display will show your selection.

3. RADIO STATION Control Knob

Turn this knob to choose radio stations.

4. SEEK/SCAN Button

SEEKPress the up or down arrow to seek to the nextor previous station and stay there. The soundwill mute while seeking.

then go on to the next station. Press one of thearrows or one of the pushbuttons again to stopscanning. SCAN will be displayed whenever thetuner is in the scan mode. In FM mode, thisfunction will scan through the current band suchas FM1 or FM2. The radio will scan stations witha strong signal only. The sound will mute whilescanning.

5. PRESET STATION Select Button

The six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations. You can set up to 18stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by

performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND select button to select AM, FM1

of FM2.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and

treble equalization that best suits the type ofstation you are listening to.

for that pushbutton.6. Repeat the above steps for each push

6. AUDIO Knob

Setting the Tone (BASS/Treble)

Push and release the AUDIO knob until or TREB appears on the display. Turn thclockwise or counterclockwise to incredecrease. The display will show the btreble level. If a station is weak or noisy, yowant to decrease the treble.

To adjust bass and treble to the middle po

push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radproduce one beep and adjust the displato the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controlsmiddle position, push and hold the AUDIOwhen no tone or speaker control is dispThe radio will produce one beep and dCENTERED.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

To adjust the balance between the right and leftspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knobuntil BAL appears on the display. Turn the knobclockwise to move the sound to the right speak-ers and counterclockwise to move the sound to

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

This feature allows you to choose bass andtreble equalization settings designed for coun-try jazz, news, pop, rock and classical stations.

Each time you press the AUTO TONE button

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close t

audio system. The audio system mnism may be damaged if you spill

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 118/253

ers and counterclockwise to move the sound tothe left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers push and release the AUDIO knobuntil FADE appears on the display. Turn theknob clockwise to move the sound to the frontspeakers and counterclockwise to move thesound to the rear speakers.

The middle position balances the sound be-tween the speakers. To adjust the balance andfade to the middle position, push the AUDIOknob then push it again and hold it until you hear

one beep. The balance and fade will be adjustedto the middle position and the display will showthe speaker balance.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control is display ALLwith the level display in the middle position.

Each time you press the AUTO TONE button,this feature will change to one of the presetequalization settings previously listed.

To return the bass and treble to the custommode, push and release the AUDIO knob untilcustom is displayed.

8. Tips About Your Audio System

Hearing damage form loud noise is almostundetectable until it is too late. Your hearing canadapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound thatseems normal can be loud and harmful to your

hearing. Take precautions by adjusting thevolume control on your radio to a safe soundlevel before your hearing adapts to it.

To help avoid hearing loss or damage do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the volume knob to the lowest setting.2. Increase volume slowly until you hear com-

fortably and clearly.

o Do not impact on the audio systethe audio system mechanism cou

damaged.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

106

D285C01O-AAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)

2. REVERSE Button

3. FORWARD Button

5. DOLBY Button 4.SIDE Button

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 119/253

6. BAND Select Button

1. SEEK Button

7. TAPE/CD Select Button

8. TAPE EJECT Button

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

D285D02O-AAT

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is bui lt to work best with tapesthat are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side.Tapes longer than that are so thin they may notwork well in this player. The longer side with the

SEEK

Press this pushbutton to go to the previousselection on the tape if the selection has beenplaying for less than three seconds. If thispushbutton is pressed and the current selectionhad been playing for more than 13 seconds it

3. FORWARD Button

Press this pushbutton to advance quicanother part of the tape. Press this pushagain to return to playing speed. The radplay the last selected station while theadvances The station frequency and FW

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 120/253

p y gtape visible should face to the right. If the ignitionis on, but the radio is off, the tape can be inserted

and will begin playing. A tape symbol is shownon the display whenever a tape is inserted. If youhear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape maynot be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove thetape and start over.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIOand SEEK controls just as you do for the radio.The display will show TAPE and an arrowshowing which side of the tape is playing. Youcan insert a tape when the ignition is off.If an error appears on the display, see "Cas-

sette Tape Message" later in this section.

1. SEEK Button

SEEK

Press this pushbutton to go to the next selectionon the tape if you press pushbutton more thanonce, the player will continue moving forwardthrough the tape. SEEK and a positive numberwill appear on the display. Your tape must haveat least three seconds of silence between eachselection for next to work. The sound still mutewhile seeking.

had been playing for more than 13 seconds, itwill go to the beginning of the previous selectionor the beginning of the current selection, de-pending upon the position on the tape. SEEK anda negative number will appear on the displaywhile the cassette player is in the previousmode. If this pushbutton is pressed additionaltimes or held, the radio will go to the displayednumber of previous selections up to 9. SEEKand a negative number will appear on the dis-play. Your tape must have at least three sec-onds of silence between each selection forprevious to work. The sound will mute whileseeking.

2. REVERSE Button

Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rap-idly. Press it again to return to playing speed.The radio will play the last selected station whilethe tape reverses. The station frequency andREV will appear on the display. You may selectstations during reverse operation by usingTUNE, SEEK or PRESET SCAN.

advances. The station frequency and FWappear on the display. You may select stduring forward operation by using TUNE,or PRESET SCAN.

4. SIDE Button

Press this pushbutton to play the other sthe tape.

5. (Dolby)

Press this pushbutton to reduce backgnoise. DOLBY B ON will appear on the dPress it again to turn Dolby B off. DOLBY will appear on the display. Dolby Noise Rtion is manufactured under a license formLaboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbthe double-D symbol are trademarks oflaboratories Licensing Corporation.

6. BAND Select Button

Press this button to listen to the radio wtape is playing. The tape will stop but remthe player.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

108

7. TAPE/CD Select Button

Press this button to play a tape when listeningto the radio. Press TAPE/CD to switch betweenthe tape and compact disc if both are loaded.The inactive tape or CD will remain safe insidethe radio for future listening

o The tape is broken. Try a new tape.o The tape is wrapped around the tape head.

Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a newtape.

CLEAN

Your tape player should be cleaned reafter every 59 hours of use. Your radidisplay CLEAN to indicate that you haveyour tape player needs to be cleaned. It wplay tapes, but you should clean it as sopossible to prevent damage to your tapeplayer If you notice a reduction in sound q

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 121/253

the radio for future listening.

8. Cassette Tape EJECT ButtonPress this button, located to the right of thecassette tape slot to eject a tape. The tape isejected with the radio off. Cassette tape may beloaded with the radio off.

9. Cassette Tape Messages

CHECK TAPE

If this message appears on the radio display, thetape won't play because of one of the following

errors.o The tape is tight and the player can't turn thetape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tapewith the open end down and try to turn theright hub counterclockwise with a pencil.Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs donot turn easily, your tape may be damagedand should not be used in the player. Try anew tape to make sure your player is work-ing properly.

If this message appears on the display, thecassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It willstill play tapes, but you should clean it as soonas possible to prevent damage to the tapes andplayer. See "Care of Your Cassette Tape Player"in the Index.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can'tbe corrected, contact your dealer.

10. Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly cancause reduced sound quality, reined cassettesor a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapesshould be stored in their case away from con-taminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. Ifthey aren't they may not operate properly ormay cause failure of the tape player.

player. If you notice a reduction in sound qtry a known good cassette to see of it is thor the tape player or fault. If this other cahas no improvement in sound quality, cletape player.

The recommended cleaning method focassette tape player is the use of a scraction, non-abrasive cleaning cassettpads which scrub the tape head as the hthe cleaner cassette turn. The recommcleaning cassette is available throughdealer.

When cleaning the cassette tape player wrecommended non-abrasive cleaning cait is possible that the cassette may ejecause the cut tape detection feature oradio may recognize it as a broken tapprevent the cleaning cassette from ejected, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC.2. Turn the radio off.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

3. Press and hold the TAPE/CD select buttonfor five seconds. READY will appear on thedisplay and a cassette symbol will flash forfive second.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cas-sette.

5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to the

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 122/253

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after themanufacturer's recommended cleaningtime.

When the cleaning cassette has been ejected,the broken tape detection feature is activeagain.You may also choose a non-scrubbing action,wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with afabrica belt to clean the tape head. This type ofcleaning cassette will not eject on its own. Anon-scrubbing action cleaner may not clean asthoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. Theuse of a non-scrubbing action, dry-tape clean-

ing cassette is not recommended.

After you clean the player, press and hold theEJECT button for five seconds to reset theCLEAN indicator. The radio will displayCLEANED to show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the soundquality may degrade over time. Always makesure the cassette tape is in good conditionbefore you have your tape player serviced.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanism

may be damaged if you spill them.o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

110

D285E01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)

2. REVERSE Button

3. FORWARD Button

4. RANDOM Button

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 123/253

7. CD EJECT Button

5. BAND Select Button

1. SEEK/SCAN But

6. TAPE/CD Select Button

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

D285F02O-AAT

Playing a Compact Disc

Insert a disc partway into the slot. Label side up.The player will pull it in and the disc should beginplaying. The display will show the CD symbol.You can inset a compact disc with the ignition off.

SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN appears onthe display and you hear a beep. Use SEEKSCAN to listen to each track for a few seconds.The sounds will mute while scanning. SCAN will

4. RANDOM Button

Press this pushbutton to hear the trarandom, rather than sequential, order. RDappear on the display. RDM T and thenumber will appear on the display whentrack starts to play. Press it again to tu

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 124/253

NOTE:

This CD player is suitable only for 12 cmdiscs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.

1. SEEK/SCAN Button

SEEK

Press this Pushbutton to go to the next TRACKand the track number will appear on the display.If you hold this pushbutton or press it more thanonce, the player will continue moving forwardthrough the disc. The sound will mute whileseeking.

SEEK

Press this Pushbutton to go to the previoustrack if the current track has been playing forless than eight seconds. If this pushbutton ispressed and the current track has been playingfor more than eight seconds, it will go to thebeginning of the current track. TRACK and thetrack number will appear on the display. If youhold this pushbutton or press it more than once,the player will continue moving back through thedisc. The sound will mute while seeking.

appear on the display. Press either SEEK SCANarrow again to stop scanning.

2. REVERSE Button

Press and hold this pushbutton to reversequickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to re-verse at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two seconds toreverse at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release it to play the passage. The display willshow ET and the elapsed time.

3. FORWARD Button

Press and hold this pushbutton to advancequickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to ad-vance at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two seconds toadvance at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release it to play the passage. The display willshow ET and the elapsed time.

random play. RDM OFF will appear odisplay.

5. BAND Select Button

Press this button to listen to the radio wdisc is playing. The disc will stop but remthe player.

6. TAPE/CD Select Button

Press this button to play a CD when listethe radio. Press TAPE CD to switch betwetape and compact disc if both are loadeinactive tape or CD will remain safely insradio for future listening.

7. CD EJECT Button

Press this button, located to the left of the Cto eject a CD. Eject may be activated withthe ignition or radio off. CDs may be loadethe radio and ignition off.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

112

8. Care of Your Compact Discs

Handle disc careful. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases away fromdirect sunlight and dust. If the surface of a discis soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping

To disable the feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the radio off.2. Press and hold the TAPE CD Button. The

radio will display READY and flash the cas-sette icon.

3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor q

discs into the CD player as damageunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins in

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 125/253

from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writingwhen handling discs. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of the hole and theouter edge.

9. Care of Your Compact Disc Player

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of theCD optics with lubricants internal to the CDmechanism.

10. CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a portable CD player adapterkit with your cassette tape player after disablingthe tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tapeplayer.

power up the radio and begin playing

This override routine will remain active untilEJECT button is pressed.

NOTE:Before you add any sound equipment toyour vehicle--like a tape player, CB radio,mobile telephone or two-way radio--be sureyou can add what you want. If you can, it'svery important to do it properly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle's engine, Delphi

Electronics radio or other systems, andeven damage them. Your vehicle's systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added improp-erly. So, before adding sound equipment,check with your dealer and be sure to checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units.

o o ot se t a yt g e co splayer slot as damage to the uni

occur.o Do not place beverages close taudio system. The playback mechmay be damaged if you spill them

o Do not impact on the audio systethe playback mechanism could beaged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other tions may skip your compact discDo not use the audio system oroads as the discs could be scraand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc withand while the disc is being pullethe unit by the self loading mechaThese can cause poor disc scratchoccur or trouble in the compacplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable oRewritable as the player could noperated in recording way of thmaker. When using the compacplayer, genuine CDs are recomme

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

D295A01O-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (D-295) (If installed)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 126/253

2. BAND Select Button

4. SEEK/SCAN Butto

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

1. POWER ON•OFF,VOLUME Control Knob

3. RADIO STATIONControl Knob

6. AUDIO Knob(BASS/MID/TREB)

5. PRESET STATION Select Button

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

114

D295B02O-AAT

1. POWER ON•OFF Control Knob

Press this knob to turn the system on and off.

VOLUME Control

To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.

SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK/SCAN arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the displayand you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen tostations for a few seconds. The radio will go toa station, stop for a few seconds, then go to thenext station Press either SEEK/SCAN arrow

PRESET SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK/SCAN arrmore than four seconds, PRESET SCAappear on the display. You will hear a dbeep. Use PERSET SCAN to listen to eyour preset stations for a few secondsradio will go to a preset station stored o

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 127/253

,Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

2. BAND Select Button

Press this button to switch between AM, FM1and FM2. Then Display shows your selection.

3. RADIO STATION Control Knob

Turn this knob to select radio stations.

4. SEEK/SCAN Button

SEEK

Press the up or down arrow to go to the nexthigher or lower station and stay there. Thesound will mute while seeking.

next station. Press either SEEK/SCAN arrowagain to stop scanning. If you press SEEK/ 

SCAN for more than four seconds, the radio willchange to preset scan mode. Then sound willmute while scanning.

5. PRESET STATION Select Button

The six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations. You can set up to 18stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.2. Press AM · FM to select the band.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization

that best suited type of station selected.5. Press and hold one of the six numbered

buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered button, the station youset will return and the equalization that youselected will also be automatically selectedfor that button.

6. Repeat the above steps for each pushbutton.

radio will go to a preset station stored opushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then

to the next preset stations. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning pr

6. AUDIO Knob

BASS

Press the AUDIO knob until BASS appethe display. Turn the knob to increase crease bass. When you use this contrradio's tone setting will switch to custom To set the bass to the middle position,

BASS and press and hold the AUDIO knoradio will produce one beep and set the dlevel to zero. To set all tone and spcontrols to the middle position, press anthe AUDIO knob when no tone or spcontrol is active. The radio will producbeep and CENTERED will appear on thplay.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

MID

Press the AUDIO knob until MID appears on thedisplay. Turn the knob to increase or decreasemid. When you use this control, the radio's tonesetting will switch to custom mode.

To set the mid to the middle position select MID

7. AUTO EQUALIZER Button

This feature allows you to choose preset bass,mid and treble equalization settings designedfor country, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classicalstations. The last setting will appear on thedisplay when you first press AUTO EQ. Eachtime you press AUTO EQ another setting will

To set the balance and fade to the position, select balance or fade and prehold the AUDIO knob.The radio will beep once and will set the dlevel to the middle position, To set all tonspeaker controls to the middle position,and hold the AUDIO knob when tone or scontrols are not active The radio will pr

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 128/253

To set the mid to the middle position, select MIDand press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio

will produce one beep and set the display levelto zero. To set all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press and hold the AUDIOknob when no tone or speaker control is active.Then radio will produce one beep and CEN-TERED will appear on the display.

TREB

Press the AUDIO knob until TREB appears onthe display. Turn the knob to increase to de-crease treble. When you use this control, the

radio's tone setting will switch to custom mode.If a station is weak or noisy, you may want todecrease the treble.

To set treble to the middle position, select TREBand press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radiowill produce one beep and set the display levelto zero. To set all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press and hold the AUDIOknob when no tone or speaker control is active.The radio will produce one beep and CEN-

TERED will appear on the display.

time you press AUTO EQ, another setting willappear on the display. Press AUTO EQ again

country disappear and CUSTOM will appear.Tone control will return to the BASS, MID andTREB. Also, if you alter BASS, MID, or TREBwhile in an auto EQ setting, the radio will returnto CUSTOM. CUSTOM will appear on the dis-play.

8. Adjusting the Speakers

BAL-FADE

The AUDIO knob adjusts balance and fade. To

adjust balance, press the AUDIO knob until BALappears on the display. Turn the knob to adjustthe sound to the left or right speakers. Themiddle position balances the sound between thespeakers. To adjust fade, press and hold theAUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display.Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the front orrear speakers. The middle position balancesthe sound between the speakers.

controls are not active. The radio will prone beep and CENTERED will appear

display.

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close t

audio system. The audio system mnism may be damaged if you spill

o Do not impact on the audio systethe audio system mechanism coudamaged.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

116

D295C01O-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (D-295) (If installed)

5. REPEAT Button

11. Song List Mode

6. RANDOM Button

1. LOAD Button

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 129/253

8. SEEK/SCAN Butt

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

3. REVERSE Button

4. FORWARD Button

2. CD EJECT Butto

9. Playing CD

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

D295D03O-AAT

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc playing will accommodate upto six discs.To insert one disc do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green.Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into theslot, label side up.The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the light will beginflashing again. Once the light stop flashingand turns green you can then load anotherdisc The disc player takes up to six discs

A small bar will appear under the CD numbis playing, it could be due to one of the folconditions:

o The road is too rough. The disc shouwhen the road is smoother.

o The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or down

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 130/253

2. Press and release the LOAD Button.

3. Wait for the light, located to the right of theslot, to turn green.4. Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into the

slot, label side up. The player will pull the discin.

NOTE:This CD player is suitable only for 12 cmdiscs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.

When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will bedisplayed. If you select an EQ setting for your

disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to playautomatically.

To inset multiple discs do the followings:

1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two

seconds.You will then hear two beeps and the light,located to the right of the slot, will begin toflash.

disc. The disc player takes up to six discs.Do not try to load more than six.

When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol willbe displayed. If more than one disc has beenloaded, number for each disc will be dis-played. If you select an EQ setting for yourdisc, it will be activated each time you play adisc.If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded willbegin to play automatically.

4. To load more than one disc but less than six,complete Steps 1, 2 and 3. When you havefinished loading discs, with the radio on or off,press LOAD to cancel the loading function.The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.

Playing a Specific Loaded CD

For every CD loaded, a number will appear onthe radio display. To play a specific CD, firstpress the CD select button to start playing a CD.Then press the numbered button that corre-

sponds to the CD you want to play.

down.o The air is very humid. If so, wait about a

and try again.

If any error occurs repeatedly or i f an errobe corrected, please contact your deayour radio displays an error message, wdown and provide it to your dealer when ing the problem.

2. CD EJECT Button

This button will eject a disc or discs, if youmultiple discs loaded. To eject a disc orfrom the disc player perform one of the folsteps:

o Press and release the eject button tthe disc that is currently playing.

o To eject all of the discs, press this buttwo seconds, you will hear three beepthe light will flash to let you know whenis being ejected.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

118

When the eject button is pressed, the receiverwill eject the disc and REMOVE CD will bedisplayed. You can now remove the disc. If thedisc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the discwill be automatically pulled back into the re-ceiver, If you try to push the disc back into thereceiver, before the 25 second time period iscomplete the receiver will sense an error and

4. FORWARD Button

Press and hold this button to advance quicklywithin a track. Release it to play the passage.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Thedisplay will show elapsed time.

5 REPEAT Button

o Press and release the RDM button tthe tracks on all of the discs that are loin random order. RDM will appear display. Press RDM to turn if off.

o To play the tracks on the disc yolistening to in random order, press anRDM for more than two seconds. Yhear three beeps and RDM will appear

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 131/253

complete, the receiver will sense an error andwill try to eject the disc several times before

stopping. You cannot repeatedly press the ejectbutton to eject the disc after you have tried topush the CD in manually. The receivers 25-second eject timer will reset at each press ofeject, which will cause the receiver to not ejectthe disc until the 25-second time period haselapsed.

Once the player stops and the disc is ejected,remove the disc. After removing the disc, pressthe VOLUME PWR knob off and then on again.This will clear the disc-sensing feature andenable discs to be loaded into the player again.

3. REVERSE Button

Press and hold this button reverse quicklywithin a track. Release it to play the passage.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Thedisplay will show elapsed time.

5. REPEAT Button

With repeat button, you can repeat one track oran entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:

o To repeat the track you are listening to,press and release the RPT button. RPTtrack will appear on the display. Press RPTagain to turn it off.

o To repeat the disc you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for two seconds.Press RPT again to turn it off.

6. RANDOM Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential order, on all ofthe discs or on one disc.To use random, do the following:

hear three beeps and RDM will appeardisplay. Press RDM again to turn if o

7. AUTO EQUALIZER

Press AUTO EQ to select the desired equalization setting while playing a codisc. The equalization will be automaticawhenever you play a compact disc.

8. SEEK/SCAN BUTTON

SEEK

Press the down arrow while playing a CDto the start of the current track if more thseconds have played. Press the up arrowto the next track. If you press the buttonthan once, the player will continue movingward or forward through the disc.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN appears onthe display and you hear a beep. Use SEEKSCAN to listen to each track for a few seconds.The sounds will mute while scanning. SCAN willappear on the display. Press either SEEK SCAN

10. Using Song List Mode

The integrated 6-disc CD changer has a featurecalled song list. This feature is capable of saving20 track selections.

To save tracks into SONG LIST perform thefollowing steps:

To play the song list, press LIST. One bebe heard and SLIST will appear on the dThe recorded tracks will begin to play order that they were saved.You may seek through the song list by usSEEK SCAN arrows. Seeking past thsaved track will return you to the first track.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 132/253

pp p yarrow again, to stop scanning.

DISC SCAN

Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than four seconds until DISC SCAN ap-pears on the display and you hear a beep. UseDISC SCAN to listen to the first track, for tenseconds of each disc loaded. The sound willmute while scanning to the next track. DISCSCAN will appear on the display. Press eitherSEEK SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

9. Playing CD

o Insert the CD to start CD playback, duringradio operation or cassette tape playing.

o When discs are in the CD deck, if you pressthe play button the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio or cassette playeris being used.

g p

1. The disc player must be on with at least onedisc loaded. See "LOAD/EJECT" previouslyfor more information.

2. The disc changer must not be in song listmode. S-LIST should not appear in the dis-play. If S-LIST is present, press SONG LISTto turn it off.

3. Select the desired disc by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use theSEEK SCAN up arrow button to locate thetrack that you want to save. The track willbegin to play.

4. Press and hold LIST for two or more sec-onds to save the track into memory. WhenLIST is pressed a beep will be heard imme-diately. After two seconds of pressing LISTcontinuously, two beeps will sound, to con-firm that the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

t ac

To delete tracks from SONG LIST perfofollowing steps:

1. The disc player must be turned on.2. Press SONG LIST to turn song list o

S-LIST will appear on the display.3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to sel

desired track to be deleted.4. Press and hold the SONG LIST but

two seconds. When pressing SONGone beep will be heard immediately. Afseconds of pressing the SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will be heaconfirm that the track had been dele

5. To delete entire lists, press and holdbutton for > 4 seconds when pressinone beep will be heard immediately. Afseconds of pressing the LIST buttotinuously, two beeps will be heard. Aseconds, a beep would be heard to cthat all the tracks had been deleted adisplay will show SLIST_EMPTY.

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

120

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit may

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 133/253

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISCS

B850A02F-AAT

Proper HandlingStorage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.

B860A01A-AAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 134/253

B850A02L

Keep Your Discs Clean

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do

not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean. See drawing.

Proper care of your cassette tapes will ethe tape life and increase your listening ment. Always protect your tapes and cacases from direct sunlight, severely codusty conditions. When not in use, cas

should always be stored in the original ptive cassette case. When the vehicle is vor cold, allow the interior temperature to bmore comfortable before listening to yousettes.

B850A01L

B

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

122

o The playback head, capstan and piners will develop a coating of tape residcan result in deterioration of sound qsuch as a wavering sound. They shocleaned monthly using a commerciallyable head cleaning tape or special savailable from audio specialty shops. the supplier's directions carefully and

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the playerwhen not being played. This could damagethe tape player unit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against the use oftapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thinand do not perform as well in the automotiveenvironment.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with theopen side facing down to prevent dust fromsettling in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replayone given tune or tape section. This cancause poor tape winding to occur, and even-tually cause excessive internal drag andpoor audio quality in the cassette. If this

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 135/253

o Be sure that the cassette label is not looseor peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audio tapesurfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-tric motors, speakers or transformers awayfrom your cassette tapes and tape playerunit.

Head

Cotton applicator

B860A01O

B860A02L

oil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly on its reel before inserting in the pRotate a pencil in the drive sprockets tup any slack.

occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by

fast winding the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the problem,do not continue to use the tape in yourvehicle.

 

FEATURES OF YOUR

ANTENNA

B870C01A-GAT

Manual Antenna (If installed)B880C02B-AAT

Glass Antenna (If installed)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 136/253

Your car uses a manual stainless steel antennato receive both AM and FM broadcast signals.Pull up the antenna using your fingers, as shownin the drawing.

When the radio power switch is turned onthe ignition key is in either the "ON" or position, your car will receive both AM abroadcast signals through the antenna

rear quarter glass.

CAUTION:Before entering an automatic car wash or aplace with a low height clearance such as aresidential or commercial garage, be surethat the antenna is fully retracted.

!

B870C01OB880C

NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tapeis loose, tighten it by turning one of thehubs with a pencil or your finger. If the labelis peeling off, do not put it in the drivemechanism.

Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,such as on top of the dashboard or in theplayer. If a tape is excessively hot or cold, letit reach a moderate temperature beforeputting it in the player.

B860A03L

 

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

124

CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the rear

quarter glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to removeforeign deposits from the inner surfaceof the glass as this may cause damage to

!B885A01O-AAT

MICRO ANTENNA (If installed)

Your car uses the micro antenna to receive bothAM and FM broadcast signals.This antenna is folding and removable type.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 137/253

g y gthe antenna elements.

o Avoid adding metallic coating (someaftermarket window tinting has metalliccontents). These can disturb receivingAM and FM broadcast signals.

CAUTION:

1. Be sure to fold the micro antenna beforeentering a garage with a low height orinstalling a car cover.

2. Before entering an automatic car remove by turning the antenna coclockwise to prevent damage to thcro antenna. To install the antennathe antenna clockwise.

!

B885A01O

B8

 

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4Starting .......................................................................... 2-5

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 138/253

2Manual Transaxle ......................................................... 2-6Automatic Transaxle ............................................ 2-8, 2-11Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-15Brake Traction Control System (BTCS) ..................... 2-15Full Traction Control System (FTCS) ......................... 2-17Full-Time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-18Limited-Slip Differential................................................ 2-20Good Braking Practices.............................................. 2-21Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-22Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-23Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-26

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03O-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 139/253

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checkedas soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garageany longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the airintake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clearof snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishingsin a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm.In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

 

DRIVING YOUR

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGIN

!! WARNING:o The 2WD Santa Fe is not designed for

off-road use. The 4WD Santa Fe is de-signed primarily for use on paved roads.However, occasional use in off-highwayconditions such as established unpaved

d d h ll i ff d

C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should a

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure thno flat tires, puddles of oil, water orindications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be suparking brake is engaged.

3 Check that all windows and lights are

o Utility vehicle have higher ground clear-ance and a narrower track to make themcapable of performing in a wide varietyof off-road applications. Specific designcharacteristics give them a higher center

f iti th di A d

WARNING:

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 140/253

roads and non-challenging off-roadtrails is allowed. The 4WD Santa Fe is notdesigned for blazing new trails, chal-lenging off-road conditions, or unpavedhill climbing. Exceeding the conditionsthat were intended for the vehicle's pri-mary design may result in injury or death.

o Utility vehicle has a significantly highercollision rate than other type of vehicles.

3. Check that all windows, and lights are

4. Check that the interior and exterior mare clean and in position.

5. Check your seat, seatback and headbe sure they are in their proper posi

6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure t

other occupants have fastened thei8. Turn off all lights and accessories th

not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to

check that all appropriate warning lighoperating and that you have sufficien

10.Check the operation of warning lights bulbs when key is in the "ON" positio

of gravitiy than ordinary cars. An advan-

tage of the higher ground clearance is abetter view of the road allowing you toanticipate problem. They are not de-signed for cornering at the same speedsas conventional 2-wheel drive vehiclesany more than low-slung sports cars aredesigned to perform satisfactorily un-der off-road conditions. If at all possible,avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.As with other vehicles of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.o In a collision crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

4 KEY POSITIONSTO START THE ENGINE

C040A01A-AAT NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" pofor more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, the igis on and all accessories may be turnedthe engine is not running, the key should

LOCK

ACC

ON

C030A01E-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manualtransaxle, place the shift lever in neutral anddepress the clutch pedal fully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,place the shift lever in "P" (park).

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andi h "START" i i R l i

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 141/253

CAUTION:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinder

while the car is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.

the engine is not running, the key should

left in the "ON" position. This will discharbattery and may also damage the ignitiotem.

o "ACC"With the key in the "ACC" position, sometrical accessories (radio, etc.) may beated.

o "LOCK"The key can be removed or inserted

position.To protect against theft, the steering locks by removing the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert thand then turn the steering wheel ansimultaneously.

C040A01E-1

START

!

turn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more that 15seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the

clutch pedal is not depressed fully(Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever isnot in "P" or "N" Position (AutomaticTransaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turned from

"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park) (For Automatic Transaxle).

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-5.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.

 

DRIVING YOUR

STARTING

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition keyC050A01A-AAT C050B01A-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and pla

gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in nor the selector lever (automatic transa"P" ( k) iti

LOCK

ACC

ON

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 142/253

!1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition

key counterclockwise from the "ACC" posi-tion to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed to

move your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.

"P" (park) position.3. After turning the ignition key to the

position, make certain all warning lighgauges are functioning properly beforeing the engine.

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully deprwhen starting a manual transaxle veYour manual transaxle equipped v

will not start unless the clutch pedal idepressed. On a manual transaxle equvehicle that can be started withoupressing the clutch, there is the potencause damage to the vehicle or injsomeone inside or outside the vehiclresult of the forward or backward ment of the vehicle that will occur clutch is not depressed when the vehstarted.

!C070C01E-1

C050A01E-1

START

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

6 OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the le

neutral for at least 3 seconds aftecar is completely stopped. Then the lever into the reverse position

o During cold weather, shifting mdifficult until the transaxle lubricawarmed up. This is normal and not ful to the transaxle.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-onds between starting attempts to protectthe starter from overheating.

C070A02A-AAT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 143/253

o If you've come to a complete stoit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Revput the shift lever in N(Neutral) poand release the clutch. Press the cpedal back down, and then shift inor R(Reverse) gear position.

o Do not use the shift lever as a haduring driving, as this can result imature wear of the transaxle shift

CAUTION:When downshifting from fifth gear to gear, caution should be taken not tovertently press the gear lever sidewasuch a manner that second gear gaged. Such a drastic downshift may the engine speed to increase to thethat the tachometer will enter the redSuch over-revving of the engine maysibly cause engine damage.

!

g

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a con-ventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is im-printed on the shift knob. The transaxle is fullysynchronized in all forward gears so shifting toeither a higher or a lower gear is easily accom-plished.

C070A01O

 

DRIVING YOUR

C070B01A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to thefloor before shifting, then released slowly. Theclutch pedal should always be used after fullyreturning to the original position. Do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal while driving. This cancause unnecessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car

C070D02O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear anddown a hill. This is extremely hazaAlways leave the car in gear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can causto overheat and malfunction. Insteadyou are driving down a long hill, slowand shift to a lower gear When you d

C070D02O-AAT

Recommended Shift Points

Shift

from-to

1-2

2 3

Recommended

mph (km/h)

15 (20)

25 (40)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 144/253

Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the caron an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.Use the parking brake to hold the car on anincline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidlyand repeatedly.

and shift to a lower gear. When you dengine braking will help slow the car

o Slow down before shifting to a loweThis will help avoid over-revving the ewhich can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter crossThis gives you much better control ocar.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped you attempt to shift into reversetransaxle can be damaged if you do nshift into reverse, depress the clutch

the shift lever to neutral, wait three secthen shift to the reverse position.o Exercise extreme caution when drivin

slippery surface. Be especially carefubraking, accelerating or shifting gearsslippery surface, an abrupt change hicle speed can cause the drive whelose traction and the vehicle to go control.

The shift points as shown on the chart arerecommended for optimum fuel economy andperformance.

2-3

3-4

4-5

25 (40)

35 (55)

45 (75)

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

8 OPERATING THE AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE (2.4L, 2.7L - 4 A/T)

! WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision crash, un unbelted person

C090A01O-GAT NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and pubutton when shifting.

Push the button when shifting

The selector lever can be shifted

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, obattery has been disconnected, m

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 145/253

, p

is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas four forward speeds and one reversespeed. The individual speeds are selected au-tomatically, depending on the position of thespeed selector lever. The selector lever has 2gates; the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent wrong selection.

y

somewhat abrupt. This is a normal ction, and the shifting sequence will aafter shifts are cycled a few times bT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

C090A01O

C

 

DRIVING YOUR

C090F01O-GAT

Sports Mode (2.4L, 2.7L - 4 A/T)

C090D02O-AAT

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During "D" range

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 146/253

!

C090E01O-AAT

o D(Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four gear sequence.

o N (Neutral):In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-

lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or

while starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

g g g

operation, green lights indicate the gear cur-rently in use.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in msports mode is selected by pushing the slever from the "D" position into the manuaTo return to "D" range operation, pus

selector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector levewards and forwards can make rapid geasimple. In contrast to a manual transaxsports mode allows gearshifts with the erator pedal depressed.UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to sone gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards oshift down one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector foor backwards twice, it is possible to sk

gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.

C

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

10

!!

o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth driving

CAUTION:o In sports mode, The driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone. For theengine protection, upward shifts aremade automatically when the engine

C090I02L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only

the vehicle has completely stoppo Do not accelerate the engine in re

or any of the forward positions wibrakes applied.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 147/253

away on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

rpm reaches the red zone.o By rapidly moving the selector lever back-

wards (-) twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd. Sincesudden engine braking and/or rapid ac-celeration can cause a loss of traction,however, downshifts must be made care-fully in accordance with the vehicle'sspeed.

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the four forwardgears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever tothe "R" or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"

position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.

pp

o Always apply the footbrake whening from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D"po

o Do not use the "P" (Park) positplace of the parking brake. Alwathe parking brake, shift the traninto "P" (Park) position and turn oignition when you leave the vehiclemomentarily. Never leave the vunattended while the engine is run

o Check the automatic transaxle fluidregularly, and add fluid as necess

o See the maintenance for the properecommendation.

 

DRIVING YOUR

OPERATING THE AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE (3.5L - 5 A/T)

C090A02L-AAT NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and push thebutton when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shifted freely.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected may be

The indicator lights in the instrument cindicate the selector lever position wh

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position whvehicle is moving.

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 148/253

C090A01O

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas five forward speeds and one reverse speed.The individual speeds are selected automati-cally, depending on the position of the speedselector lever. The selector lever has 2 gates;the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 5positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent wrong selection.

somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-tion, and the shifting sequence will adjustafter shifts are cycled a few times by theT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

ignition is switched "ON". During sportsoperation, green lights indicate the gearently in use.

C090A02L

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

12

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

C090D02A-AAT

C095F01O-GAT

Sports Mode (3.5L - 5 A/T)C090B01A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-

lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 149/253

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090E01L-AAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. This position is used formost city and highway driving, for starting froma full stop to maximum speed. The transaxle willautomatically shift through a five gear sequence.

C

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in msports mode is selected by pushing the selever from the "D" position into the manuaTo return to "D" range operation, pusselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector levewards and forwards can make rapid geasimple. In contrast to a manual transaxsports mode allows gearshifts with the erator pedal depressed.

tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

!

 

DRIVING YOUR

UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shiftup one gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backward once to shiftdown one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwardsor backwards twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the five forward

gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever tothe "R" or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, de

the brake pedal when shifting fromtral" position or "Park" positionforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in theposition and the brake pedal fulpressed in order to move the shiftfrom the "P" (Park) position to any

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 150/253

CAUTION:o In sports mode the driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone. For theengine protection, upward shifts aremade automatically when the enginerpm reaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice, it is possible to skipone gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd or 5thto 3rd. Since sudden engine brakingand/or rapid acceleration can cause aloss of traction, however, downshiftsmust be made carefully in accordancewith the vehicle's speed.

! o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

( ) p yother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from"N", "D" position to "P" positionvehicle must be fully stopped to transaxle damage.

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

14

!C090N02O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R".

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel

ments, such as sharp lane changfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision crash, un unbelted p

C090I02L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 151/253

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

is significantly more likely to die tperson wearing a seatbelt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increayou lose control of your vehicle atway speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if tmore wheels drop off the roadwathe driver oversteers to reenter theway.

o In the event your vehicle leaves theway, do not steer sharply. Insteaddown before pulling back into the

lanes.o Never exceed posted speed limits

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D" posi-tion.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recomendation.

 

DRIVING YOUR

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEMANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

!C120A02A-AAT

(If installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.

WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due to im-proper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always

C300A02O-AAT

BRAKE TRACTION CONTROL SYS

(BTCS) (If installed)

On slippery road surfaces, the traction csystem (TCS) limits the drive wheelsspinning excessively, thus helping the accelerate. It also provides sufficient force and steering performance as the caat accelerated speeds.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 152/253

NOTE:During ABS operation, a slight pulsationmay be felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise may beheard in the engine compartment whilebraking. These conditions are normal andindicate that the anti-lock brake system isfunctioning properly.

be reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicle shouldbe driven at reduced speeds:

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is pit-

ted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by high speeddriving or cornering. This could endangerthe safety of yourself or others.

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning esively during starting or while making acated turns on slippery roads to avoid losdriving force of the driven wheels.

Driving hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sdecelerate the car sufficiently before encurves.

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

16

C300D02O-AAT

Indicator and Warning

The TCS indicator should illuminate whignition key is turned to ON or START but sgo out after three seconds.If the indicator does not illuminate, have it chby an authorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions

d i hil d i i TCS ill i

C300B01O-AAT

TCS ON Mode

When the TCS is running, the TCS indicator inthe instrument cluster will blink.

NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatically be

turned ON after the engine is turned offand restarted.

2) Wh h i l i

! CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP func-tion has been activated. It also means thatthe road is slippery or your car is accelerat-ing excessively. In this situation, gentlyrelease foot pressure from the acceleratorpedal and maintain moderate speed.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 153/253

device while driving, TCS illuminates as aing.If TCS illuminates, pull your car to a safeand stop the engine. Then, start the again to check if the TCS indicator goes

If the indicator remains lit even after the ehas been started, have your car checkedauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:When the TCS indicator illuminatestion control is automatically deactfor safety.

2) When the traction control system is op-erating properly, you can feel a slightpulsation in the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control and indicatesnothing unusual.

3) When the engine starts, a click is heardfrom the engine compartment; however,this is only the sound of traction controlbeing checked.

4) When moving out of the mud or freshsnow, pressing the accelerator pedalmay not cause the engine speed to in-crease due to TCS operation.

! WARNING:Traction control is only a driving aid; allnormal precautions for driving in inclementweather and on slippery road surfacesshould be observed.

 

DRIVING YOUR

C310A01O-AAT

FULL TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM

(FTCS) (3.5 L only) (If installed)

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning exces-sively during starting or while making acceler-ated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing thedriving force of the front wheels.

Driving hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to

d l t th ffi i tl b f t i

C310B01O-AAT

TCS ON/OFF Mode

When the TCS is running, the TCS indicthe instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing thswitch, the TCS-OFF indicator will come ostay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP cwill be deactivated. Adjust you driving aingly. To turn the system back on, pre

it h i Th TCS OFF i di t h

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 154/253

!

On slippery road surfaces, the traction controlsystem (TCS) limits the drive wheels fromspinning excessively, thus helping the car to

accelerate. It also provides sufficient drivingforce and steering performance as the car turnsat accelerated speeds.

HSM434

decelerate the car sufficiently before enteringcurves.

CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP controlhas been activated. It also means that theroad is slippery or your car is acceleratingexcessively. In this situation, release footpressure from the accelerator pedal and

maintain moderate speed.

WARNING:Traction control is only a driving aid; allnormal precautions for driving in inclementweather and on slippery road surfacesshould be observed.

!

switch again. The TCS-OFF indicator shooff.

NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatica

turned ON after the engine is turnand restarted.

2) When the traction control system erating properly, you can feel a pulsation in the vehicle. This is oneffect of brake control and indnothing unusual.

3) When the engine starts, a click is from the engine compartment; howthis is only the sound of traction cbeing checked.

4) When moving out of the mud orsnow, pressing the accelerator may not cause the engine speed crease due to TCS operation.

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

18FULL-TIME 4WD OPERATION

!WARNING:

This vehicle is designed primarily froad use. Driving the vehicle in challeoff-road conditions for which it wadesigned may result in damage to thhicle. Driving in conditions that exceevehicle's intended design or the d

experience level may result in severe

C310D01O-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS orTCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have it checked by an authorizeddealer.

C350A02O-AAT

(If installed)

Engine power can be delivered to all front andrear wheels for maximum power. Full-time 4WDis useful when good traction is required, suchas, when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud.These vehicles, however, are not designed forchallenging off-road use. Full-time 4WD ve-

hicles are designed primarily to improve traction

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 155/253

experience level may result in severe or death.

Driving 4WD Safely

(1)Be sure to wear the seat belt.(2)Do not drive in challenging off-road

tions or areas that exceed the vebasic design intent or the driver's eence level.

(3) Drive at lower speeds in strong cross

Because of your vehicle's high cengravity, its stability will be affected in winds. Slower speeds ensure better vcontrol.

(4) Check the brake condition after drivingor muddy conditions. Press the brakeral times as you move slowly until yonormal braking forces return.

(5) Do not drive the vehicle through watestreams, rivers, lakes, etc.)

Should there be any unusual conditions in thedevice while driving, TCS-OFF indicator illumi-nates as a warning.If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:1) When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,

traction control is automatically deacti-vated for safety.

2) This warning function is not providedwhen the driver selects the TCS-OFFmode.

hicles are designed primarily to improve tractionand performance on paved roads and high-ways in wet and/or slippery conditions. Occa-sional off-road use such as established un-paved roads and trails is OK. It is alwaysimportant when traveling off-highway that thedriver carefully reduce their speed to a level thatdoes not exceed the safe operating speed forthose conditions. In general, off-road conditionsprovide less traction and braking effectivenessthan on road conditions. These factors must becarefully considered when driving off-road.

Keeping the vehicle in contact with the drivingsurface and under control in these conditions isalways the driver's responsibility for the safetyof him/herself and his or her passengers.

 

DRIVING YOUR

(6)The stopping distance of the full-time 4WDvehicle differs very little from that of the 2WDvehicle.When driving on a snow-covered road or aslippery, muddy surface, make sure thatyou keep a sufficient distance between yourvehicle and the one ahead of you.

(7) Since the driving torque is always applied tothe 4 wheels, the performance of the full-time4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the con-dition of the tires Be s re to eq ip it ith all

o In rare cases when it's unavoidaba 4WD vehicle is to be inspect

speedometer test on 2WD roll

CAUTION:Never engage the parking brake whilforming these tests.

!o While towing, check the following items.

1. The ignition switch is in "ACC" or"ON".

2. Place the shift lever in neutral (ForAutomatic Transaxle, "N" position).

3. Release the parking brake.

NOTE:To avoid serious damage to your 4WD ve-

hicle limit towing to 10 mph and not forth 1 il t ANY TIME

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 156/253

dition of the tires. Be sure to equip it with allfour tires of the same size and type.o When replacement of any of the tires or

disc wheels is necessary, replace all ofthem.

o Rotate the tires and check the tire pres-sure at regular intervals.

(8) The full-time 4WD vehicle cannot betowed by an ordinary tow truck. Makesure that the vehicle is towed with itsfour wheels raised off the ground.

o Roadside Assistance Program:Off-roading is not covered. To receiveservice, the vehicle must be on a publiclymaintained road.

o If the vehicle is towed with its only twowheels raised off the ground, the 4WDsystem could be damaged.

o In unavoidable case, if the vehicle isbeing towed with all four wheels on theground, it should be towed only forwarddirection with rope.

HSM281Roll tester(Speedometer)

Temporary free roller

speedometer test on 2WD roll strictly follow the procedures nex1. Check the tire pressures r

mended for your vehicle.2. Place the front wheels on t

tester for speedometer as shothe illustration.

3. Release the parking brake.4. Place the rear wheels on the t

rary free roller as shown in the ition.

(9)For speedometer test or inspection/mainte-nance (I/M) program of SANTA FE 4WD,use a four wheel chassis dynamometer.

hicle, limit towing to 10 mph and not formore than 1 mile at ANY TIME.

! WARNING:Keep away from the front of the vwhile inspecting. This is very dangerothe vehicle can jump forward and serious injury or death.

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

20LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

! CAUTION:

o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is being

!D190A01O-GAT

(If installed)

A limited-slip differential, if equipped, is rear wheel differential only. The featureslimited-slip differential are described belJust as with a conventional differentiawheel on one side is allowed to turn at a dispeed from the wheel on the other side whvehicle is cornering. The difference be

the limited slip differential and a conven

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane charges orfast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-

way speeds

(10) When using tire chains, always attach themto the front wheels.

(11)If the front or rear wheels get stuck in themud, do not spin them recklessly. The 4WDsystem could be damaged.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 157/253

o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is beingraised on a jack, never start the engine orcause the tires to rotate.There is the danger that rotating tirestouching the ground could cause thevehicle to go off the jack and to jumpforward.

o If one of the front or rear wheels beginsto spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehiclecan sometimes be driven out by de-pressing the accelerator pedal further;however, avoid running the engine con-tinuously at high rpm because doing socould damage the 4WD system.

the limited-slip differential and a convendifferential is that if the wheel on one sidevehicle loses traction, a greater amotorque is applied to the rear wheel on theside to improve traction.

way speeds.o In a collision crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die a per-son weara seatbelt.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

 

DRIVING YOUR

GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Ethe parking brake and place the geartor lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) oror reverse gear (manual transaxle). car is facing downhill, turn the front winto the curb to help keep the car from If your car is facing uphill, turn thewheels away from the curb to help kecar from rolling. If there is no curb orrequired by other conditions to keep tfrom rolling block the wheels

o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents

C130A01A-AAT

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of thecargo area cover behind the rear seat. Ifthere were an accident or a sudden stop,such objects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-

pants

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 158/253

from rolling, block the wheels.o Under some conditions your parking

can freeze in the engaged position. most likely to happen when there is cumulation of snow or ice around or nerear brakes or if the brakes are wet. Iis a risk that the parking brake may fapply it only temporarily while you pgear selector lever in "P" (automaticfirst or reverse gear (manual transaxlblock the rear wheels so the car cann

Then release the parking brake.o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgradthe accelerator pedal. This can cautransaxle to overheat. Always use thepedal or parking brake.

ponents.o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply

the brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don't let your car creep forward.To avoid creeping forward, keep your footfirmly on the brake pedal when the car is

stopped.

pants.

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes may cause the car to

pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly until the braking action returnsto normal, taking care to keep the car undercontrol at all times. If the braking action doesnot return to normal, stop as soon as it is safeto do so and call your Hyundai dealer forassistance.

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

22

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions

o Remember, your Hyundai does not rextended warm-up. As soon as the eis running smoothly, you can drive awvery cold weather, however, give yogine a slightly longer warm-up period

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lis driving too slowly in too high a gear ing in the engine bucking. If this hapshift to a lower gear. Over-revving is the engine beyond its safe limit. This avoided by shifting at the recomm

C140A01A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other traffic

so you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 159/253

you drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

avoided by shifting at the recommspeeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. Tconditioning system is operated by epower so your fuel economy is rewhen you use it.

so you don t have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and also

increase wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

 

DRIVING YOUR

SMOOTH CORNERING

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be

WINTER DRIVING

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol

Coolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling sysis the only type of coolant that should bebecause it helps prevent corrosion in theing system, lubricates the water pumprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or r

ish your coolant in accordance with the

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 160/253

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially very hazardouspractices.During deceleration, use engine braking to the

fullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle.Also, apply the brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tire will providea greater driving force, but will not prevent sideskids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states. Check state laws before fitting tire chains.

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the bsystem. Visually inspect the battery and

as described in Section 6. The level of cin your battery can be checked by your Hydealer or a service station.

ish your coolant in accordance with the tenance schedule in Section 5. Before whave your coolant tested to assure tfreezing point is sufficient for the temperanticipated during the winter.

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

24

C160I01A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Fre

Under some conditions your parking brafreeze in the engaged position. This islikely to happen when there is an accumof snow or ice around or near the rear bor if the brakes are wet. If there is a riparking brake may freeze, apply it only trarily while you put the gear selector leve

(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (mtransaxle) and block the rear wheels so t

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if

Necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 161/253

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow Accum

Underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice caup under the fenders and interfere wsteering. When driving in severe winter

tions where this may happen, you shoulodically check underneath the car to be sumovement of the front wheels and the stcomponents is not obstructed.

( ) g (transaxle) and block the rear wheels so tcannot roll. Then release the parking brC160H01A-AAT

Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Window

Washer System

To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved anti-freezesolution in accordance with instructions on thecontainer. Window washer anti-freeze is avail-able from Hyundai dealers and most auto partsoutlets. Do not use engine coolant or other typesof anti-freeze as these may damage the finish.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and Ignition

System

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 and replace them if necessary. Alsocheck all ignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn or damaged inany way.

 

DRIVING YOUR

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A01A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflation

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct tion and always keep them clean. Whenduring the day in conditions of poor visiis helpful to drive with headlights on lowThis enables you to be seen as well as

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 162/253

Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

26 TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake s

directly to the vehicle brake systeo When towing a trailer on steep grad

excess of 12%) pay close attentionengine coolant temperature gauensure the engine does not overh

the needle of the coolant tempegauge moves across the dial to

!C190A01S-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from State to State the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, or other types ofvehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that its location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distrib-utes the tongue load uniformly throughout thechassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician DO NOT

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 163/253

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between yoand the trailer or vehicle you are towing ftrailer or vehicle could wander dangeacross other lanes of traffic and ultimatelythe roadway. To eliminate this potentialgerous situation, safety chains, attachetween your car and the trailer or towed vare required in most states.

g g"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soit is safe to do so, and allow the eto idle until it cools down. Youproceed once the engine has csufficiently.

!yand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOT

USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.

C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See Maintenance UnderSevere Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

 

DRIVING YOUR

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.

2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-

2). The total gross vehicle weight is the

C190E02O-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

2.4(2WD)

2.7(2WD)

2.7(4WD)

3 5(2WD)

To

170

120

320(

270(

270(

220

330(

Lbs

Trailer

1700(771)

1200(544)

3200(1452)

2700(1225)

2700(1225)

2200(998)

3300(1497)

Maximum Towable

Type A

Type B

Type A

Type B

Type A

Type B

Type A

With

Brake

Engine

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 164/253

x 100 = 10% (MAX)

combined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.

Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the cargo area can overloadthe rear axle. Redistribute the load andcheck the axle weight again.

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailerload.

o Tongue load

o Tongue loads can be increased or de-creased by re-distributing the load in thetrailer.This can be verified by checking the totalweight of the loaded trailer and then checkingthe load on the tongue.

SSA2200B

Total trailer weight

! CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the chart.

Tongue load Total trailer weight

3.5(2WD)

3.5(4WD)

280

280

230(

100

120

120

150

2800(1270)

2800(1270)

2300(1043)

1000(453)

1200(544)

1200(544)

1500(680)

Type B

Type A

Type B

Without

Brake

WithoutBrake

+ABS

2.4(2WD)

2.7(2WD)

2.7(4WD)

3.5(2WD)

3.5(4WD)

2.4(2WD)

2.7(2WD)2.7(4WD)

3.5(2WD)

3.5(4WD)

Type A : Vehicle carrying 2 passengersType B : Vehicle carrying 5 passengers

 

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

28

8. If the trailer has electric brakes, stavehicle and trailer moving, and then aptrailer brake controller by hand to be subrakes are working. This lets you your electrical connection at the sam

9. During your trip, check occasionallysure that the load is secure, and thlights and any trailer brakes are still w

10.Avoid jerky starts, sudden accelerasudden stops.

11.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane cha12 Avoid holding the brake pedal down to

!C190F01O-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.

2. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.

3. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do not

tow a trailer with the transaxle in fifth gear(manual transaxle) or overdrive (automatic4 Th bi ti i ht ( f

WARNING:o Improperly loading your car and trailer

can seriously affect its steering and brak-ing performance causing a crash whichcould cause serious injury or death.

o Do not exceed 45 mph or the postedtowing speed limit, whichever is lower.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 165/253

12.Avoid holding the brake pedal down toor too frequently. This could cause the to overheat, resulting in reduced befficiency.

13.When going down a hill, shift into a loweand use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downstransaxle to a lower gear and reduce to reduce chances of engine overloand/or overheating.

14.If you have to stop while going uphill, hold the vehicle in place by pressing accelerator. This can cause the auttransaxle to overheat. Use the parkingor footbrake.

15.If the transaxle shifts frequently whileup a hill, shift down one gear.

NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid frequently.

( a ua t a sa e) o o e d e (auto at ctransaxle).

4. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

5. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your car. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.

6. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keep

a constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

7. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.

4. The gross combination weight (sum ofyour vehicle weight plus its load and thetotal trailer weight) must not exceed thefollowing.

4WD

-

7400(3357)

7500(3402)

Lbs. (kg)

2WD

6000(2721)

7700(3493)

7800(3538)

Combination WeightEngine

2.4

2.7

3.5

 

DRIVING YOUR

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near red zone),taking the following action may reduce oreliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.

ff

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 166/253

4. While in stop and go traffic, place thegear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.

 

If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6

Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-6If Y C M t b T d 3 10

3

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 167/253

g gIf Your Car Must be Towed ......................................... 3-10Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-12If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-13

3

 

32

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!

D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns

Over Slowly

D010C01Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but

Not Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, ch

connectors at ignition, coil and sparkReconnect any that may be disconnecloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine roo

4. If engine still refuses to start, call a Hdealer or seek other qualified assist

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded and

create a fire hazard.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 168/253

dea e o see ot e qua ed ass st

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keestraight line. Move cautiously off the ra safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your v

will not start, contact a Hyundai deaseek other qualified assistance.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, besure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting".

D010B01Y

 

WHAT TO DO IN AN EME

JUMP STARTING

o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clear water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do

not smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.

Then attach the other end of the sameto the positive (+) post or cable of the bbattery. Next, using the other cable, one clamp to the negative (-) post orof the booster battery. Then attach theend of that cable to a solid metal partengine away from the battery. Do nnect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the bbattery and let it run for a few minutes

will help to assure that the booster batfully charged. During the jumping ope

D020A02A-AAT

B t

Dischargedbattery

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 169/253

!

in the vicinity.o The battery being used to provide the jump

start must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown on the illustration. First,attach one clamp of the jumper cable to thepositive (+) post or cable of the dischargedbattery.

fully charged. During the jumping operun the engine in this vehicle at aboutrpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with thcharged battery using the normal sprocedure. After the engine starts, lea

 jumper cables connected and let the run at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for sminutes.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cablesreverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery bedischarged (because the lights were leetc.), have the charging system checkyour Hyundai dealer.

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,

serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

HSMJ401

Boosterbattery

 

34

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!WARNING:

While the engine is running, keep hair,hands and clothing away from moving partssuch as the fan and drive belts to preventinjury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or

engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaid l f i

6. If you cannot find the cause of the oveing, wait until the engine temperatureturned to normal. Then, if coolant halost, carefully add coolant to the res(page 6-9) to bring the fluid level reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert fther signs of overheating. If overhhappens again, call a Hyundai deaassistance.

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking, the engine is probably toohot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-matic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and set

the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 170/253

!!

dealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates theleak in the cooling system and this sbe checked as soon as possible by a Hydealer.

turn it off.3. If engine coolant is running out under the car

or steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until thecoolant has stopped running or the steaminghas stopped. If there is no visible loss ofengine coolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolant leaking fromthe radiator, hoses or under the car. (If theair conditioning had been in use, it is normalfor cold water to be draining from it when youstop).

 

WHAT TO DO IN AN EME

SPARE TIRE

D040A01O-GAT

The following instructions for the FULL SIZEspare tire should be observed:

Check inflation pressure as soon as practicalafter installing the spare tire, and adjust to thespecified pressure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintained at thespecified pressure while the tire is stored.

Spare Tire Pressure

D040B02B-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 171/253

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

Full Size

30 psi (207 kPa)

To remove the spare tire

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the mounting bolt cover with a

screw driver or coin.

D040B01O3. Loosen the mounting bolt with a whe

wrench.

D0

 

36

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A01A-AATD050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal andlet the car slow down while driving straightahead. Do not apply the brakes immediatelyor attempt to pull off the road as this maycause a loss of control. When the car hasslowed to such a speed that it is safe to doso, brake carefully and pull off the road.

Drive off the road as far as possible and parkon firm, level ground. If you are on a divided

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 172/253

The procedure described on the followingcan be used to rotate tires as well as to ca flat tire. When preparing to change a flcheck to be sure the gear selector lever is(automatic) or reverse gear (manual tranand that the parking brake is set, then:

D

4. Lift up the hanger and separate it from theholder, then lower the hanger and removethe spare tire.

To reinstall the spare tire

1. Set the spare tire on the center of the hanger,

and then raise the hanger and hook it onto theholder.2. Tighten the mounting bolt with the wheel nut

wrench.3. Install the mounting bolt cover with a screw

driver.

, g yhighway, do not park in the median areabetween the two traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on your emer-gency hazard flashers, set the parking brakeand put the transaxle in "P" (automatic) orreverse (manual transaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the car. Besure they all get out on the side of the car thatis away from traffic.

4. Change the tire following the instructionsprovided on the following pages.

D040B03O

 

WHAT TO DO IN AN EME

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the WheelD060B02O-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

Flat tire

D060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 173/253

Remove the spare tire and remove the jack andtool bag from the luggage compartment.

NOTE:The spare tire is located underneath the car.

Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite fromthe flat to keep the vehicle from rolling when thecar is raised on the jack.

D060B01O HSM382-1

The wheel nuts should be loosened sbefore raising the car. To loosen the nutthe wrench handle counterclockwise. doing this, be sure that the socket is scompletely over the nut so it cannot slip o

maximum leverage, position the wrench handle is to the left as shown in the drThen, while holding the wrench near the the handle, push down on it with steadysure. Do not remove the nuts at this timloosen them about one-half turn.

D0

 

38

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

!WARNING:

Do not get under the car when it isported by the jack! This is very dangas the vehicle could fall and cause seinjury or death. No one should stay car while the jack is being used.

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in PlaceD060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

Wrench bar

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 174/253

The base of the jack should be placed on firm,level ground. The jack should be positioned asshown in the drawing.

After inserting a wrench bar into the wheel nutwrench, install the wrench bar into the jack asshown in the drawing. To raise the vehicle, turnthe wheel nut wrench clockwise. As the jackbegins to raise the vehicle, double check that it

is properly positioned and will not slip. If the jackis on soft ground or sand, place a board, brick,flat stone or other object under the base of the

 jack to keep it from sinking.Raise the car high enough so that the fullyinflated spare tire can be installed. To do this,you will need more ground clearance than isrequired to remove the flat tire.

D060E01O-1 HFC4022

Wheel nutwrench

 

WHAT TO DO IN AN EME

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing WheelsD060H02O-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 175/253

!Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them withyour fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheelon the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up theholes with the studs and slide the wheel onto

them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly andget the top hole in the wheel lined up with the topstud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth untilthe wheel can be slid over the other studs.

WARNING:Wheels and wheel covers may have sharpedges. Handle them carefully to avoid pos-sible severe injury. Before putting the wheelinto place, be sure that there is nothing onthe hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheel fromfitting solidly against the hub. If there is,remove it. If there is not good contact on themounting surface between the wheel andhub, the wheel nuts could come loose andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheelmay result in loss of control of the vehicle.This may cause serious injury or death.

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the studthe wheel nuts on the studs and tightenfinger tight. The nuts should be installetheir small diameter ends directed inward.the tire to be sure it is completely seated

tighten the nuts as much as possible witfingers again.

HSM355

HSM357

 

310

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF YOUR CAR MUST BE TOWED

D080A01A-AATD060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten NutsD060J02O-AAT

After Changing Wheels

o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICL

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 176/253

!Lower the car to the ground by turning the wheelnut wrench counterclockwise. Then positionthe wrench as shown in the drawing and tightenthe wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not stand on the

wrench handle or use an extension pipe overthe wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening every other nutuntil they are all tight. Then double-check eachnut for tightness. After changing wheels, havea technician tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve capand check the air pressure. If the pressure islower than recommended, drive slowly to thenearest service station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct.

Always reinstall the valve cap after checking oradjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not re-placed, air may leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it as soon aspossible.After you have changed wheels, always securethe flat tire in its place and return the jack andtools to their proper storage locations.

CAUTION:Your car can be damaged if towed rectly!

If your car has to be towed, it should be dyour Hyundai dealer or a commercial towservice. This will help assure that your cadamaged in towing. Also, professionagenerally aware of state and local laws ging towing. In any case, rather than risk dato your car, it is suggested that you shoinformation to the tow truck operator. Bthat a safety chain system is used and tstate and local laws are observed.

D060I01O D040B03O

D0

TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICL

 

WHAT TO DO IN AN EME

!D080B02O-AAT

Towing a Car With Manual TransaxleD080C01O-AAT

Towing a Car With Automatic Tran

CAUTION:o When towing the 2WD vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground, the vehicleshould be towed with wheel lift typetruck.Otherwise, the CV joint boot can inter-fere with the towing hook caused byinsufficient clearance resulting in CV

joint boot damage.o 4 Wheel Drive cannot be towed with a

to tr ck It st be to ed b lifting allo DO NOT TOW 4WD

OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUALo DO NOT TOW 4WD

NOT OK FOR AUTOMATIC

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 177/253

o If the car is being towed with the rear wheelson the ground, be sure the parking brake isreleased.

o If the car is being towed with the front wheelson the ground, be sure that the transaxle is

in neutral. Also, be sure that the ignition keyis in the "ACC" position. This is necessary toprevent damage to the steering lock mecha-nism, which is not designed to hold the frontwheels straight while the car is being towed.

o If any of the loaded wheels or suspensioncomponents are damaged, a towing dollymust be used.

tow truck. It must be towed by lifting all4 wheels.

CAUTION:o A car with an automatic transaxle s

never be towed from the rear wit

front wheels on the ground. Thicause serious damage to the tranIf the car must be towed from the rtowing dolly must be used undefront wheels.

o If the car is being towed with awheels on the ground, it can be only from the front. Be sure thtransaxle is in neutral. Do not tspeeds greater than 30 mph (50

D080B01O-1 D0

o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUALTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLEWITH NO DAMAGE (except 4WD)

o NOT OK FOR AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

o OK FOR MANUAL TRANSAXLE(except 4WD)

!

 

312

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D080D01O-AAT

EMERGENCY TOWINGFor emergency towing when no commtow vehicle is available, attach a tow chain or strap to one of the towing hooksthe front/rear of your car. Be very carefuattempting this procedure when the vehicany unpaved surface to avoid damage tvehicle.Nor should towing be attempted if the wdrive train, axles, steering or brakes areaged. Before towing, be sure the transax

neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the eoff) or in the "ON" position (with the erunning). A driver must be in the towed

and for more than 15 miles (25 km). Besure the steering is unlocked by placingthe key in the "ACC" position.A driver must be in the towed vehicle tooperate the steering and brakes.

<Front>

If the car is being towed with the rear wheels onthe ground, be sure the parking brake is re-leased.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 178/253

running). A driver must be in the towedsteer it and operate the brakes.

NOTE:To avoid serious damage to your 4Whicle, limit the towing to 10 mph and nmore than 1 mile at ANY TIME.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of thetransaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" markon the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot addfluid, a towing dolly must be used as de-scribed above.

D080C02O

o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUALTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

HSM430

HSM235-1

<Rear>

Towing Hook

Towing Hooks

 

WHAT TO DO IN AN EME

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber.If you lock the keys inside your car and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealerscan use special tools to open the door for you.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 179/253

 

4

Corrosion Protection ...............................................................4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ...................................................4-2Washing and Waxing ..............................................................4-3Cleaning the Interior ................................................................4-5

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 180/253

4

 

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to

your car clean and free of corrosive maAttention to the underside of the car is plarly important

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from started by observing the following:

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Corro-

sion

By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality.However, this is only part of the job. To achievethe long-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperation

and assistance is also required.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSIO

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 181/253

larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area —road salts are used, near the ocean,with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—should take extra care to prevent coIn winter, hose off the underside of yoat least once a month and be sure tothe underside thoroughly when winover.

o When cleaning underneath the caparticular attention to the components the fenders and other areas that are from view. Do a thorough job; just damthe accumulated mud rather than wasaway will accelerate corrosion rather prevent it. Water under high pressursteam are particularly effective in reaccumulated mud and corrosive ma

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings by

stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

 

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARAN

WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

M i t ll t d th fl t d

E020D01A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion This is particularly true if you

E030A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface from being in the sun. Always wash your the shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasivcan scratch the paint if it is not removepollution or acid rain may damage the patrim through chemical action if pollutan

allowed to remain in contact with the surfyou live near the ocean or in an area whesalts or dust control chemicals are use

o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 182/253

Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

for corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

salts or dust control chemicals are useshould pay particular attention to the unof the car. Start by rinsing the car to removand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have through mud or muddy water, be sure toughly clean the underside as well. Use direct stream of water to remove accumuof mud or corrosive materials. Use aquality car-washing solution and follomanufacturer's directions on the pacThese are available at your Hyundai deauto parts outlet. Don't use strong houdetergents, gasoline, strong solvents orsive cleaning powders as these may dthe finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it freand don't damage the finish by rubbing toFor stubborn spots, dampen them freqand remove them a little at a time.

 

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

4

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before poor waxing or using a combination cleanwax. Use a good quality commercial pand follow the manufacturer's directions container. Polish and wax the bright trim as well as the paint.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,

industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove the

l t d di t ild hi l

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-

num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the

h l th hl ft d

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 183/253

You should polish and wax the car againwater no longer beads on a clean surfaspreads out over a larger area.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.

wheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.

 

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARAN

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery

(If installed)

In the normal course of use, leather uphosurfaces will, like any material, pick-up dudirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned omay work into the surface of the leather,ing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cwhen necessary. Washing leather thorwith soap and water will keep your lustrous beautiful and ensure you have

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-

line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clear water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-

faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 184/253

lustrous, beautiful and ensure you haveyears of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using ansoap and lukewarm water, work up alather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipewith a slightly damp cloth and dry with sofDo this as often as the leather becomes

During tanning operations, sufficient o

incorporated through processing that nonebe applied during the life of the leathapplied to the finished surface will in no wathe leather and may do more harm thanVarnishes and furniture polishes should be used under any conditions.

and mild soap or car-washing solution.o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-

peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.

 

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

6 ANY QUESTIONS?

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer's direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add

water. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care ocar, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 185/253

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this may

weaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.

 

5

Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 186/253

5

 

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspeadjustments and replacements that are lithe maintenance charts starting on pagThese procedures must be performed intervals shown in the maintenance scheassure that your warranty remains in Although it is strongly recommended thabe performed by the trained technicians a

Hyundai dealer, these procedures may bformed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai s

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply with

the terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further information

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 187/253

parts be used for any required repairsplacements. Other parts of equivalent such as engine oil, engine coolant, manauto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so onare not supplied by Hyundai Motor Compits distributor may be used without affyour warranty coverage but you should abe sure these are equivalent to the qualityoriginal Hyundai parts. Your Owner's book provides further information abouwarranty coverage.

about these warranties.

 

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUI

F020A02Y-AAT

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

REQUIREMENTS

o Inspection should be performed any malfunction is experienced or suspe

o Receipts for all emission control sservices should be retained to demoncompliance with conditions of the emisystem warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (24km), continue to follow the prescribedtenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance re

F010D02A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-5.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number of

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglovebox. This will help ensure that you candocument that the required procedures havebeen performed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthi bli ti b h d t

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 188/253

gments, see page 5-6 of this section.

so, you ca spec a d se ce a u be oitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

this publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.

 

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B01O-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

DESCRIPTIONNo.

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

15

24

12

22.5

36

18

30

48

24

37.5

60

30

45

72

36

52.5

84

42

60

96

48

67.5

108

54

75

120

60

82.5

132

66

90

144

72

97.5

156

78

105

168

84

112.5

180

90

120

192

96

127.5

204

102

135

216

108

142

22

11

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission seto protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 189/253

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSES

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

R R R R

I

I

I

R

R R R

R

I

R

I

I

I

R

R

R R R R

I

I

I

R

R R

R

I

R R

I

I

I

R

R

R R R

 

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUI

F030C05O-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT

COOLANT

TIMING BELT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID AND FILTER

BRAKE FLUID

1

2

3

4

5

6

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

2.4 DOHC (ALT, W/PUMP)/3.5 V6(ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)

2.7 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)

7.5

12

6

I

15

24

12

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

30

48

24

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

45

72

36

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

60

96

48

I

I

R

R*¹

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

75

120

60

R

I

82.5

132

66

I

90

144

72

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

105

168

84

I

R

112.5

180

90

I

120

192

96

I

I

R

R*¹

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

135

216

108

I

I

142

228

114

I

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 190/253

Note : *1. For california, this maintenance is recommended, but not required.*2. Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)and replace every 62,000 miles (100,000 km).*3. With LSD- Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) and replace every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)

Without LSD- lnspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD)

REAR AXLE OIL (4WD)

PROPELLAR SHAFT CLEAN, BOLT RETIGHTEN (4WD)

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

See Note *2

See Note *3

 

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

F040A02O-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appromaintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGSBRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS, PARKING BRAKE

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

R

RI

I

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLYMORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVINGCONDITIO

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, F, H

C, E

B, HC, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 191/253

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA - Repeated short distance drivingB - Extensive idlingC - Driving in dusty, rough roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in

very cold weatherE - Driving in sandy areas

*1. Transfer case Oil and Rear Axle Oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

F - More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weatherabove 90°F (32°C)

G - Driving in mountainous areasH - Towing a trailerI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use and vehicle toJ - Driving over 100 mph

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ 

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID AND FILTER

TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD) *1

REAR AXLE OIL (4WD) *1

I

I

R

R

R

R

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM)

EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM)

EVERY 50,000 MILES (80,000 KM)

With LSD

Without LSD

C, D, E, F, G

C, E, F

A, C, D, E, F, G,

A, C, E, F, G, H,

C, E, G, I

C, E, G, I

 

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUI

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connec-tions

Ch k th f l li f l h d

F060A01A-AAT F060B01A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation andreplace if necessary. Drive belts should bechecked periodically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

F060F01O-AAT

o Vacuum Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evideheat and/or mechanical damage. Harbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abraand excessive swelling indicate deterioParticular attention should be paid to exthose hose surfaces nearest to highsources, such as the exhaust manifoldInspect the hose routing to assure th

hoses do not come in contact with ansource, sharp edges or moving compwhich might cause heat damage or mechwear Inspect all hose connections su

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 192/253

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Have a trainedtechnician replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.

wear. Inspect all hose connections, suclamps and couplings, to make sure thsecure, and that no leaks are present. should be replaced immediately if thereevidence of deterioration or damage.

 

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

8

F070D01A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil accordthe maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possiblebefore adding oil. Do not overfill.

F070E03A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid and F

The fluid level should be in the "HOT" raF060E01A-AAT

o Timing Belt

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

F065F01O-AAT

o Crankcase Ventilation Hose

Inspect the surface of hose for evidence of heatand/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittlerubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, andexcessive swelling indicate deterioration. Par-ticular attention should be paid to examine thathose surface nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hose

does not come in contact with any heat source,sharp edges or moving component which mightcause heat damage or mechanical wear. In-spect all hose connections, such as clamps and

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 193/253

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chcracks, deterioration and any leakage. Reany deteriorated or damaged parts imately.

the dipstick, after the engine and transaxat normal operating temperature. Cheautomatic transaxle fluid level with the erunning and the transaxle in neutral, wparking brake properly applied. Use GENHYUNDAI ATF or DIAMOND ATF SP-IIIATF SP-III when adding or changing fluF070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.

g

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt fordamage and deformation. Replace any dam-aged parts immediately.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed.

p , pcouplings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hose should bereplaced immediately if there is any evidence ofdeterioration or damage.

 

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUI

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specified

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F070H01O-AAT

o Rear Brake Discs and Linings/ Parking Brake

Check the rear brake discs and linings for

F070P01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamk d i i d R l

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and H

Check the power steering pump and hosleakage and damage. Replace any damaleaking parts immediately. Inspect the steering belt for evidence of cuts, crackcessive wear, oiliness and proper teReplace or adjust it if necessary.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 194/253

torque.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Check the rear brake discs and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/ 

Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check

for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and cotions for leakage and damage. Check aditioning performance according to the reshop manual if necessary.

cracks, deterioration, or damage. Repladamaged parts and, if necessary, repagrease.

 

6

Engine Compartment ..............................................................6-2General Checks .......................................................................6-5Checking the Engine Oil ........................................................ 6-6Changing the Oil and Filter .................................................... 6-7Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant .................... 6-8Spark Plugs ........................................................................... 6-10Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ......................................... 6-12Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) .............................. 6-13Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) 6 14

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 195/253

6Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) ..................... 6-14Checking the Brakes ........................................................... 6-16Checking the Clutch Fluid .................................................. 6-17Air Conditioning Care........................................................... 6-18Checking Drive Belts ........................................................... 6-20Checking and Replacing Fuses........................................ 6-21

Checking the Battery ........................................................... 6-22Power Steering Fluid Level ................................................ 6-24Replacement of Light Bulbs ............................................... 6-26Bulb Wattage ......................................................................... 6-33Fuse Panel Description....................................................... 6-34

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010A01O-AAT

(2.4 DOHC)

1 2 3 4

CAUTION:

When inspecting or servicing the eyou should handle tools and other objects carefully so that the plastic cothe engine is not damaged.

!

5

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 196/253

6 7 8 9 10 11

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse and Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Radiator cap10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipst

(Vehicle with Automatic Transaxle)11. Battery

g g

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

G010B01O-AAT

(2.7 V6)1 2 3 4

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the eyou should handle tools and other objects carefully so that the plastic co

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 197/253

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir3. Air cleaner4. Fuse and Relay box

5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir6. Power steering fluid reservoir7. Engine oil level dipstick8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil filler cap10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipst

(Vehicle with Automatic Transaxle)11. Battery

G

5 6 7 8 9 10 11

objects carefully so that the plastic cothe engine is not damaged.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

4

G010C01O-AAT

(3.5 V6)

1 3 4 5

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the eyou should handle tools and other objects carefully so that the plastic co

!

2

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 198/253

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse and Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil level dipstick10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipst11. Battery

6 7 8 9 10 11

objects carefully so that the plastic cothe engine is not damaged.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

GENERAL CHECKS

G020C01A-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked eachwhen the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (a

conditioning, if installed)

o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation including parking b

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade condition

o Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition

(including spare tire)

G020A01A-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Clutch fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid level

o Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery condition

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 199/253

o Brake operation, including parking bo Manual transaxle operation, including

operationo Automatic transaxle operation, inc

"Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not ocorrectly or appears to be functioning coinspect it carefully and seek assistanceyour Hyundai dealer if service is neede

(including spare tire)o Battery conditiono Air filter condition

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.

G030C02A-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

G030B01A-AAT

Recommended Oil

Before checking the oil, warm up the engthe normal operating temperature and byour car is parked on level ground. Tuengine off.

Wait five minutes , then remove the dwipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and wiit again. Then note the highest level the reached on the dipstick. It should be bethe upper ("FULL") and lower ("LOW")

G030D01A-AAT

Adding Oil

2.4 DOHC 2.7 V6

2 4 DOHC 27 V6

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 200/253

SH, SG or SG/CD (API) multi-grade and fuelefficient oil is recommended.

HSM395

HSM3892.4 DOHC 2.7 V6

HSM427

3.5 V6

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark

HSM426

G040A03A-GAT The engine oil and filter should be chanthose intervals specified in the mainteschedule in Section 5. If the car is being in severe conditions, more frequent oil anchanges are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and as follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and sparking brake. Start the engine and

warm up until the needle on the ctemperature gauge moves above the mark. Turn the engine off and place thselector lever in "P" (automatic) or r

( l t l )HSM394

2.4 DOHC 2.7 V63.5 V6

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 201/253

!

If the oil level is close to or below the L mark,add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do notoverfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks isequal to about 1 quart of oil.

gear (manual transaxle).2. Open the hood and remove the eng

filler cap.3. Slide underneath the car and loos

drain plug by turning it counterclockwisa wrench of the proper size. Be sure drain pan is in position to catch the odrains out, then remove the drain plu

G040A02L

WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engas it may be hot enough to burn you

3.5 V6

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

8 CHECKING AND CHANGING T

ENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap wheengine is hot. When the engine is hoengine coolant is under pressure anderupt through the opening if the cremoved. You could be seriously buryou do not observe this precaution. D

remove the radiator cap until the radicool to the touch.

4. When the oil has stopped draining, replacethe drain plug using a new washer andretighten by turning it clockwise.

Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m

5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the propersize. A certain amount of oil will come outwhen you remove the filter. So be sure to

have your drain pan in place underneath it.6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the

instructions on the carton or on the filter itself.Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque :1 2 1 6 kgf m) Be s re that the mo nting

!PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact with theskin for prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-ways protect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap and warm

water as soon as possible after handlingused oil.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 202/253

!1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m) Be sure that the mountingsurface on the engine is clean and that theold gasket is removed completely. Lubricatethe new gasket on the filter with clean engineoil before installation.

7. Refill the crankcase with the recommendedengine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-ter 9 for engine oil capacity.

8. Start the engine and check to be sure no oilis leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.

9. Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. It issuggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service station forreclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it in with the household

trash.

WARNING:Used motor oil may cause irritation or can-cer of the skin if left in contact with the skinfor prolonged periods of time. Wash yourhands thoroughly with soap and warmwater as soon as possible after handling

used oil.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration of

antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.

G050C01A-AAT

To Check the Coolant LevelG050D02A-AAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed atintervals specified in the vehicle mainteschedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:Engine coolant can damage the finyour car. If you spill engine coolant ocar, wash it off thoroughly with clean

1. Park the car on level ground, set theing brake and remove the radiator capcool.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 203/253

g

Ambient

temperature

°F (°C)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is cool. If the levelis below the "L" mark, add engine coolant tobring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,

inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

G050C01O

G

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwiseout pressing down on it, until it stopsrelieves any pressure remaining in theing system. And remove the radiator cpushing down and turning countewise.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

1 0 SPARK PLUGS

!

G060A02Y-AAT

2.4 DOHC 2.7 V6 / 3.5 V

   0 .   0

   3   9

  ~   0 .   0

   4   3

   i  n .   (   1 .   0  ~   1 .   1

  m  m   )

   0 .   0

   3   9

  ~   0 .   0

   4   3

   i  n .   (   1 .   0  ~   1 .   1

  m  m   )

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-

ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off

3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, then securely close the drain cock.

4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer's directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.

5. Fill the radiator with clean demineralized ordistilled water. Continue to add clean dem-

ineralized or distilled water in small quantitiesuntil the fluid level stays up in the radiatorneck.

7. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps andcheck to be sure the drain cocks are fullyclosed and not leaking.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 204/253

Your engine was originally equipped withnum-tipped spark plugs.Platinum-tipped spark plugs will last longeconventional type spark plugs and cidentified by blue lines on the ceramic s

NOTE:

Do not clean or regap platinum-tipped plugs.

6. Start the engine, top off the radiator withwater and then add coolant to the reservoiruntil the level is between "L" and "F".

creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

G050D02O

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

G060B02O-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5 or whenever engineperformance indicates they should be changed.Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug perfor-mance include engine misfiring under load, lossof fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. Whenspark plugs are replaced, always use spark

plugs recommended by Hyundai. The use ofother spark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine damage.

NOTE:

G060C0IO-AAT

Changing the Spark Plugs

G C O

G

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 205/253

o When replacing the spark plug, genuineHyundai replacement parts are recom-mended.

o It is recommended that the spark plugshould be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer. (2.7 L, 3.5 L)

Recommended Spark Plugs:

Type

RN10PYP4 (CHAMPION)

PGR5C-11 (NGK)

RC10PYPB4 (CHAMPION)

PFR5N-11 (NGK)

Remark

2.4 L

2.7 L / 3.5 L

!You will find it easier to change spark plugs if theengine is cold. Always change one spark plugat a time. This helps avoid getting the wiresmixed up.

1. Remove the center cover (2.4 L) on the

engine rocker cover.2. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt that has

accumulated around the base of the sparkplug so it cannot fall into the cylinder when thespark plug is removed.

3. To remove the spark plug cable, pull straightup on the insulated connector, not the cable.Pulling on the cable may damage the carboncore conductor.

G060C01O

WARNING:It is recommended that the engine beor cold when changing the spark pluthe engine is hot, you could burn yoon the insulated connector, the sparkor the engine itself.

4. When preparing to remove the oldplug, guide the socket down over theplug, being careful not to damage tramic insulator.

5. To remove the old spark plug, tuwrench handle in a counterclockwisetion.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

1 2 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADESCHANGING THE AIR CLEANER

FILTER

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully ins

G070A01E-AAT

To change the filter unsnap the clips around the

G070A01O

6. To install the new spark plug, guide thesocket down over the spark plug, beingcareful not to damage the ceramic insulator.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 206/253

The wiper blades should be carefully insfrom time to time and cleaned to removemulations of road film or other debris. Tothe wiper blades and arms, use a clean sor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and If the wipers continue to streak or smeglass, replace them with genuine Hyund

placement parts or their equivalent.

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around thecover. When this is done, the cover can be liftedoff, the old filter removed and the new filter putin its place. Genuine Hyundai ReplacementParts are recommended.

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a proper

air filter in place can result in excessiveengine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter, becareful that dust or dirt does not enterthe air intake. These may result in dam-age to the air cleaner filter.

!! CAUTION:

o Do not operate the wipers on dry This can result in more rapid wear wiper blades and may scratch the

o Keep the blade rubber out of cwith petroleum products such as eoil, gasoline, etc.

G060C03O

NOTE:Spark plugs should be tightened to speci-fication. Over-tightening can damage thethreads in the aluminum cylinder head.

Also, leaving them too loose can cause thespark plug to get very hot and possiblyresult in damage to the engine.

7. Replace the cable by pushing the insulatedconnector directly down onto the electrode.Check to be sure it has snapped into placeand can't fall off.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE O

(MANUAL)

FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G090A01O-AAT

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the

CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car's finish.

o The washer should not be operated if thewasher reservoir is empty. This can dam-age the washer fluid pump.

G090A01O

!G100A02O-AAT

Transaxle lubricant in the manual tra

Filler plug

Drain plug

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 207/253

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thewindshield washer system.A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during inclementweather or whenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.

The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.59U.S. quarts (3.4 Liters).

Transaxle lubricant in the manual trashould be checked at those intervals spin the vehicle maintenance schedule in 5.

Recommended Oil

Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS75W/90 (API GL-4) or EQUIVALENT manual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity

The oil capacity of the manual transaxle U.S. quarts (2.3 liters).

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

1 4 CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE

FLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle be checked at those intervals specified vehicle maintenance schedule in Section

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basicallcolor. As driving distance increasefluid color turns darkish red graduallya normal condition and you shouljudge the need to replace based upo

changing color.You must replace the automatic tranfluid in accordance with intervals spin the vehicle maintenance schedusection 5

!

G100B02A-AAT

To Check the Manual Transaxle Fluid

Level

WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxle oillevel when the engine is cool or cold. If theengine is hot, you should exercise greatcaution to avoid burning yourself on hotengine or exhaust parts.

Park the car on level ground with the engine off.

1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosenthe oil filler plug by turning it counterclock-wise and remove it with your fingers.

2. Use your finger or suitable tool to feel insidethe hole. The oil level should be at its bottomedge. If it is not, check for leaks beforeadding oil. To refill the transaxle or bring theoil level up,add oil slowly until it reaches theproper level. Do not overfill.

3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in withyour fingers and then tighten securely withthe wrench.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 208/253

section 5.

SSA6100B

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

G110D02O-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

C090A01O

G110C01O-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is8.98 U.S. quarts (8.5 liters).

G110B03A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is speciallydesigned to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINEATF or DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III.Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is notcovered by your new vehicle limited warranty.

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe itreinsert the dipstick as far as it will go

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 209/253

! Park the car on level ground with the parkingbrake engaged. When the transaxle fluid levelis checked, the transaxle fluid should be atnormal operating temperature and the engineidling.

While the engine is idling, apply the brakes andmove the gear selector lever from "P" to eachof its other positions —"R", "N", "D" —and thenreturn to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,long hair and clothing clear of any movingparts.

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot

so you should exercise great care not toburn yourself during this procedure.

reinsert the dipstick as far as it will goremove it again. Now check the fluid lethe dipstick. It should be in the "HOT"on the dipstick.

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use ato add transaxle fluid through the dtube until the level reaches the "HOT"

Do not overfill.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

1 6 CHECKING THE BRAKES

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir be checked periodically. The level shobetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on thof the reservoir. If the level is at or belo

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conformDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your system. Follow the instructions printed ocontainer.

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level!

HJM5044

Fluid level should be within "HOT" range

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 210/253

"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it"MAX". Do not overfill.

!

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

!WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so that

you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

HSM158

CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

G130A01A-AAT

To Check the Clutch Fluid

HSM158

!

G130B02A-AAT

To Replace the Fluid

Recommended brake fluid conforming to3 or DOT 4 specification should be usereservoir cap must be fully tightened tocontamination from foreign matter or m

NOTE:Do not allow any other liquids to conate the brake fluid. Seal damage will

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake flcan damage your vision if you get it in

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 211/253

! WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a

sealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.

The clutch fluid level in the master cylindershould be checked when performing other un-der hood services. The system should bechecked for leakage at the same time. Checkto make certain that the clutch fluid level isalways between the "MAX" and "MIN" level

markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch systemwhich should be inspected and repaired imme-diately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.

g y y geyes. It will also damage your vepaint if spilled on it and not removed diately.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

1 8 AIR CONDITIONING CARE

When the air conditioning is being usedlarly, the compressor drive belt tension

G140D02A-AAT

Checking the Compressor Drive Belt

2.7 V6 2.4 DOHC

Auto tensioner

G

3.5 V6

Crank shaft apulley A/C pulley

Power steering pulley Genera

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fans.

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-

tion

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 212/253

y, pbe checked at least once a month wengine turned off.To check the drive belt tension, press dothe belt halfway between the engine craand compressor pulleys. Pressing withfinger, you should not be able to deflect th

anymore than 1/3 of an inch. If the beltloose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai

HSM396

COMP

Eng.pulley Eng.pulleyCOMP

0.315 in.

!

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY

G160A01A-AAT

CLUTCH PEDAL

G160A01E

0.24 ~ 0.51 in.(6 ~ 13 mm)

G170A01A-AAT

BRAKE PEDAL

H

0.12 ~ 0.31(3 ~ 8 mm)

G150A01A-AAT

STEERING WHEEL

G150A01O

1.18 in.

(30 mm)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 213/253

With the engine off, press lightly on the clutchpedal until you feel a change in resistance. Thisis the clutch pedal free-play. The free-playshould be within the limits specified in the illus-tration. If it is not, have it inspected by yourHyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if

necessary.

With the engine off, press down on thepedal several times to reduce the vacuumbrake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowthe brake pedal until you feel a chanresistance. This is the brake pedal free

The free-play should be within the limits fied in the illustration above. If it is not, inspected by your Hyundai dealer and aor repaired if necessary.

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop thecar with the wheels pointed straight ahead andgently move the steering wheel back and forth.Use very light finger pressure and be sensitiveto changes in resistance that mark the limits ofthe free-play. If the free-play is greater than

specified, have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 0 CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

CLEARANCE

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G180A01A-AAT

You need a helper to check the brake pedall With th i i h

G180A01L

2.95 in. (75 mm)

Drive belts should be checked periodicaproper tension and adjusted if necessary. same time, belts should be examined for wear, fraying or other evidence of deterand replaced if necessary.Belt routing should also be checked to bthere is no interference between the belother parts of the engine. After a belt is repthe new belt should be adjusted again afor three weeks to eliminate slack resultininitial stretching after use.

G190A01A-AAT

HSM396

2.7 V6 2.4 DOHC

COMP

Eng.pulley Eng.pulleyCOMP

0.315 in.

Power steeringPower steering

Auto tensioner

GeneratorGenerator

Eng.coolant

0.30~0.48 in. 0.24~0.35 in.

35 V6

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 214/253

clearance. With the engine running, have yourhelper press down on the brake pedal severaltimes and then hold it down with a force of about110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-ance is the distance from the top surface of thebrake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under thefloor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not within thelimits specified in the illustration, have it in-spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G140D02L

3.5 V6

Crank shaft apulleyA/C pulley

Power steering pulley Generator

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

CHECKING AND REPLACING

FUSES

!

G200B01A-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuses

CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.

If any of your car's lights or other eleaccessories stop working, a blown (opencould be the reason. If the fuse has openewill see that the metal strip inside the fusmelted through. If you suspect a blownfollow this procedure:

1. Turn off the ignition and all other sw2. Open the fuse box and examine eac

Remove each fuse by pulling it towa(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained

fuse box to simplify this operation).3. Be sure to check all other fuses evenfind one that appears to have opene

G200A02A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link 

G200A01L

Good Open-Replace

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 215/253

The fuse box for the lights and other electricalaccessories will be found low on the dashboardon the driver's side. Inside the box you will finda list showing the circuits protected by eachfuse.

HSM391

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,

repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a relay box foreasy inspection.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 2 CHECKING THE BATTERY

!4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new

fuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.

CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is a prob-lem in the electrical circuit. If you replace afuse and it blows as soon as the accessoryis turned on, the problem is serious andshould be referred to a Hyundai dealer fordiagnosis and repair. Never replace a fusewith anything except a fuse with the sameor a lower amperage rating. A higher capac-

ity fuse could cause damage and create afire hazard.

!

G210A01A-AAT

D0

NOTE:See page 6-34 for the fuse panel descrip-

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 216/253

G200B03Y

Good Open-Replace

! WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When wwith batteries, carefully observe the ing precautions to avoid serious inj

The fluid in the battery contains a strong sof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and corrosive. Be careful not to spill it on youthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yoimmediately do the following:

p g p ptions.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLIN

FANS

!

!

G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by ecoolant temperature and may someoperate even when the engine is noning. Use extreme caution when wnear the blades of the cooling fan, syou are not injured by a rotating fan As the engine coolant temperatur

creases the fan will automatically shThis is a normal condition.

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk of

magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.

While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle's generator),

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicals

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 217/253

y g y g )they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking inthe area.

o Keep children away from the area.

Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the State of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 4 POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A03A-AAT

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser cooling fan should come onautomatically whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.

The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly To check the power steering fluid

G230A01O

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power

ing hose connections for fluid leakage atintervals specified in the vehicle mainteschedule in Section 5.The power steering hoses should be reif there is severe surface cracking, pscuffing or worn spots Deterioration of the

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the steering oil reservoir is empty.

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 218/253

regularly. To check the power steering fluidlevel, be sure the engine is "OFF", then checkto make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately after theengine is started in extremely cold condi-tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops duringwarm up, there is no abnormal function inthe system. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.

G250A01A-AAT

FOR MORE INFORMATION A

YOUR HYUNDAIIf you desire additional information abouttaining and servicing your Hyundai, yopurchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hdealer's parts department. This is themanual used by dealership technicianwhile it is highly technical it can be usobtaining a better understanding of your chow it works.

scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of thecould cause premature failure.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G290B01O-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight Asse

Replacement

G

L

W

H

Cut-off line

Ground

Horizontal line

Vertica

6. Draw the vertical line (through the center ofeach headlight beam pattern) and the hori-zontal line (through the center of each head

G290A01O

Verticalaiming

G290A02O-AAT

Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times.Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3m)from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and

spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driveror equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on the

headlights (Low beam).5. Open the hood.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 219/253

If the vehicle has had front body repair aheadlight assembly has been replaceheadlight aiming should be checked usaiming chart as shown in the illustration. Tthe headlight switch. (Low Beam Positio

1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of parallel to center line of the body aligned with point "P" shown in the illus

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show theof headlights.

G

!

zontal line (through the center of each head-light beam pattern) on the aiming screen.And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8 in. (21mm) under the horizontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver -

VERTICAL AIMING.

WARNING:Horizontal aiming should be adjusted byan authorized Hyundai dealer.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 6 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

!

G260A02A-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be surethe switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach thelight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure toreplace the burned-out bulb with one of thesame number and wattage rating.

See page 6-33 for the wattage description.

CAUTION:Keep the lamps out of contact with petro-leum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.

SPECIFICATION:

"H";Horizontal center line of headlights fromground: 2WD : 32.5 in.(822 mm)

4WD : 33.3 in.(843 mm)"W";Distance between each headlight center:46.5 in.(1,178 mm)

"L";

Distance between the headlights and thewall that the lights are tested against:118 in. (3,000 mm).

G270A01O-AAT

Headlight and Front Turn Signal L

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye pro2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic

avoid touching the glass.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 220/253

4. Using a socket wrench of the correc

remove the headlight assembly mobolts.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.

5. Disconnect the power cord from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

HSM328

HSM329

8. Push the bulb spring to remove the hebulb.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 221/253

G270A01O

7. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 8

! WARNING:

G

12.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,remove from the bulb holder and install thenew bulb.

HSM332

9. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlight

HSM331

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 222/253

WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas undersure and if impacted could shatter, ing in flying fragments. Always weaprotection when servicing the bulb. Pthe bulb against abrasions or scra

and against liquids when lighted. Tubulb on only when installing in a heaReplace the headlight if damaged or crKeep the bulb out of the reach of chand dispose of the used bulb with c

atc g t e pastc base t t e ead g thole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-nect the connector.

10.Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-ly dispose of the old bulb.

11.Check for proper headlight aim.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

G270B01O-AAT

Rear Combination Light1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the mounting screws as shown

with a phillips screwdriver.

HSM352

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

HSM423

G270C01O-AAT

Luggage Compartment Light

1. Open the tail gate.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 223/253

HSM337

3. To replace the rear combination light (stop/ tail light, turn signal light, back-up light, sidemark light), take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.

(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Turn signal light(3) Back-up light(4) Side mark light

4. Install the new bulb.

p g2. Remove the cover with a flat-head

driver.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3 0

G270E01O-AAT

Front Side Mark Light

1. Remove the cover with a phillips screw-

HSM3342. Disconnect the connector.

HSM342

3. Replace with a new bulb.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 224/253

driver.

3. Replace with a new bulb.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

G270G01O-AAT

Interior Light

HSM343

1. Remove the cover with a flat-head screw-

HSM344

2. Replace with a new bulb.

G270H01O-AAT

Glove Box Illuminated Light

1. Open the glove box.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 225/253

driver. 2. Remove the cover with a flat-head driver.

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3 2

G270E02L

3. Disconnect the connector.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 226/253

HTB284

4. Replace with a new bulb.

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

BULB WATTAGE

G280A02O-AAT

1

2

3 4

6 7 8

9

10

12 G

11

5

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 227/253

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Part Name

Head Light (Low/High)

Front Fog Light (If installed)

Turn Signal Light

Side Mark Light

Front Door Edge Warning Light (If installed)

Glove Box Illuminated Light

Map Light

Interior Light

Wattage

55/60

27

28

5

5

10

15

10

No.

9

10

11

12

Wattag

17

10

5

27/8

27

27

5

Part Name

High Mounted Rear Stop Light

Luggage Compartment Light

License Plate Light

Rear Combination Light

Stop/Tail Light

Turn Signal Light

Back-up Light

Rear Side Mark Light

 

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3 4 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01O-AAT

Engine CompartmentFUSE

RATING

120A

50A

50A

40A

30A

30A

40A

30A

40A

20A

15A

10A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Generator

Tail lamp relay, Fuse 11~17, Power connector

Start relay, Ignition switch

A/C Fuse, Blower relay

ABS control module, Air bleeding connector

ABS control module, Air bleeding connector

Engine contorl relay

Power window relay, Fuse 26

Radiator fan relay

Condenser fan relay

Fog lamp relay

Left head lamp Instrument cluster DRL control modu

ALT

B+

IGN

BLR

ABS.1

ABS.2

ECU

P/W

RAD FAN

C/FAN

FRT FOG

H/LP(LH)

FUSIBLE

LINK

DESCRIPTION

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 228/253

G200C01O-A

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspefuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

10A

10A

20A

20A

10A15A

20A

10A

10A

10A

Left head lamp, Instrument cluster, DRL control modu

Right head lamp

Ignition failure sensor, Oxygen sensor

Injector

Check engine ind, ECM, PCMFuel pump relay, ECM, TCM, Generator, PCM

ATM contorl relay, 4WD control module

Horn relay

A/C relay

PCM, ECM

H/LP(LH)

H/LP(RH)

ECU #1

ECU #2

ECU #3ECU(B+)

ATM

HORN

A/C

ST SIG

FUSE

 

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT

G200E01O-AAT

Inner Panel PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Cigarette lighter & Power outlet

Audio, Power outside mirror

Digital clock, Rear power outlet

Cruise control

Head lamp relay

Seat warmer

Rear wiper motor control

Rear window defogger, Power outside mirror

A/C control, Sunroof controller, Electrical chrome mirror

(Not used)

Room lamp, Door warning switch, Door lamp, Manual A/C control, Homelink controDigatal clock, ETACM, Audio, Siren

AMP speakers

Stop lamp, Data link connector, Multipurpose check connector

Hazard lamp

Power seat, Rear wiper motor control

Sunroof controller

D f l

FUSERATING

20A

10A

15A

10A

10A

25A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

15A

20A

10A

10A

25A

20A

30A

FUSE

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 229/253

G200E01O-A

Defogger relay

Instrument cluster, Pre-excitation resistor, ETACM, Auto light sensor,

DRL control module, Generator

SRS control module

ECM (V6 2.7L), PCM (I4 with A/T), ECM (I4 with M/T)

Instrument cluster (Air bag IND)

ABS control module, G-Sensor, Air bledding connector, 4WD control moduleTurn signal lamp

Back-up lamps, TCM, Vehicle speed secsor, ETS control module, Ignition failure s

Door lock/unlock relay, Key lock/unlock relay

Tail & parking lamp (LH), Turn signal lamp, License lamp

Tail & parking lamp (RH), Fog lamp relay, Switch illumination

ETS control module (V6 3.5L), Fail safety relay

Radiator fan relay, Condenser fan relay

Front wiper motor, Wiper relay, Washer motor

30A

10A

15A

10A

10A

10A10A

10A

20A

10A

10A

15A

10A

20A

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23F24

F25

F26

F27

F28

F29

F30

F31

 

7

Emission Control System ...................................................... 7-2EGR System ............................................................................7-3Catalytic Converter .................................................................7-3

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 230/253

7

 

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010B01A-AAT1. Crankcase Emission Control

System

The positive crankcase ventilation system isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies filtered air to thecrankcase through the air intake hose. Insidethe crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-bygases, which then pass through the PCV valveand into the induction system.

H010A02O-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all requirements of theU.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-fornia Air Resources Board.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel taabsorbed and stored in the canister. Whengine is running, the fuel vapors absorthe canister are drawn into the induction through the purge control solenoid valv

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PC

The purge control solenoid valve is coby the Engine Control Module (ECM); wh

engine coolant temperature is low duringthe PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel taken into the engine. After the engine wup during ordinary driving, the PCSV opintroduce evaporated fuel to the engine

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-

ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor

R ) S

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 231/253

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control Sys

The Exhaust Emission Control System

highly effective system which controls eemissions while maintaining good vperformace.

Caution for the Inspection and MaintenanceTest (V6 Vehicle with Traction Control Sys-tem)

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, discon-nect the ABS connector in the enginecompartment. (2.7 V6 only)

o For more information, see shop manual(Wheel Speed Sensor).

o After dynamometer testing is completed,erase the ABS/TCS DTC (DiagnoticTrouble Code) with a GST (Generic ScanTool) or Hi-Scan Pro.

Recovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from of the fuel tank to be loaded into acanister while refueling at the gas station, pre-venting the escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

 

EMISSION CONTROL

CATALYTIC CONVERTEREGR SYSTEM

!H010E01Y-AAT(If installed)

This system helps reduce nitrogen oxides byrecirculating a part of the exhaust gas into theengine, thereby reducing cylinder combustiontemperature, which results in lower output ofoxides of nitrogen.

WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good ope

condition. Extremely high catalyticverter temperatures can result froproper operation of the electricaltion or multiport electronic fuel tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knockshard to start, have your Hyundai inspect and repair the problem asas possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuelRunning out of gasoline may causengine to misfire and result in damthe catalytic converter.A id idli th i f

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and

H020A01O

Catalytic Converter

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 232/253

o Avoid idling the engine for plonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushpulled to get started. This may causcatalytic converter to overheat an

ate a fire hazard.o Do not touch the catalytic converany other part of the exhaust swhile the catalytic converter is hotoff the engine, wait for at least onebefore touching the catalytic conor any other part of the exhaust s

o Remember that your Hyundai deayour best source of assistance.

nitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.Exhaust gases passing through the catalyticconverter cause it to operate at a very hightemperature. The introduction of large amountsof unburned gasoline into the exhaust may

cause the catalytic converter to overheat andcreate a fire hazard. This risk may be reducedby observing the following:

 

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

4

!WARNING:

o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 233/253

 

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)....................................8-2Engine Number ........................................................................8-2Recommended Inflation Pressures .....................................8-2Snow Tires ................................................................................ 8-3Tire Chains ................................................................................ 8-3Tire Rotation..............................................................................8-4

Tire Balancing...........................................................................8-4Tire Traction ..............................................................................8-4When to Replace Tires...........................................................8-4Spare Tire and Tools ..............................................................8-5Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .................................8-5Consumer Information 8 6

CONSUMER INFORMATION &

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

8

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 234/253

Consumer Information ............................................................8-6Reporting Safety Defects ...................................................... 8-8 8

 

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

2 TIREENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)

I030A02S-AAT

RECOMMENDED INFLATION

SURES

I020A01A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundchosen to provide the best performannormal driving.

I010B01A-AATI010A02A-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. It

I010A01OI010B01O

2.4 DOHC 2.7 V6

3.5 V6

2 3

1 4

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 235/253

g p g pcan be found in four different places on your car:

1. On the bulkhead between the engine andpassenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.

3. Door edge post.4. On the lower side of the center pillar outer

panel.

The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.

The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel gives the tire prerecommended for your vehicle.

I

I010B01L

 

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY

I040A01O-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires, they shouldbe the same size and have the same loadcapacity as the original tires. Snow tires shouldbe installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poorhandling may result.S ti h ld 4 i (28 kP ) i

RIM

SIZE

TIRE

SIZE

PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)

UP TO 2 PERSONS UP TO MAX.LOAD

FRONT

207(30)

REAR

207(30)

FRONT

221(32)

REAR

221(32)225/70R166.5Jx16

These pressures were chosen to provide themost satisfactory combination of ride comfort,tire wear and stability under normal conditions.Tire pressures should be checked at leastmonthly. Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

o Lower-than-recommended tire pressurescause uneven tread wear and poor handling.

o Higher-than-recommended tire pressuresincrease the chance of damage from im-pacts and cause uneven tread wear.

o Never overload your car. Be especiallycareful about overloading if you equipyour car with a luggage rack or car topcarrier.

CAUTION:!

!

I050A03A-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should be instathe front wheels. Be sure that the chaiinstalled in accordance with the manufainstructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do not cto use tire chains when they are no needed.

WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mkm/h).

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire & chains.

o If you have noise caused by chain

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 236/253

!Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more airpressure than the pressure recommended forthe standard tires on the tire label on the driver'sside of the center pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewall whichever

is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)when your car is equipped with snow tires.

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tires are cold.That is, after the car has been parked forat least three hours and hasn't beendriven more than one mile or 1.6 km sincestarting up.

o Check the pressure of your spare tireeach time you check the pressure ofother tires.

o If you have noise caused by chaintacting the body, retighten the chavoid contact with the vehicle bo

o To prevent body damage, retightechains after driving 0.3 ~ 0.6 miles

 

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

4

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worntires, tires that are improperly inflated or onli d f Ti h ld b

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affect handlingand tire wear. The tires on your Hyundai werebalanced before the car was delivered but mayneed balancing again during the years you ownthe car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for repair, itshould be rebalanced before being reinstalledon the car.

I090A01A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car have treadindicators. The tread wear indicators awhen the tread depth is 0 06 in (1 6 mm

Wear ind

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)

I060A01O-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles(12,000 km). If you notice that tires are wearingunevenly between rotations have the car

HA1409Spare tire

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 237/253

slippery road surfaces. Tires should be re-placed when tread wear indicators appear. Toreduce the possibility of losing control, slowdown whenever there is rain, snow or ice on theroad.

when the tread depth is 0.06 in. (1.6 mmtire should be replaced when these appa solid bar across two or more grooves tread. Always replace your tires with ththe recommended size. If you change w

the new wheel's rim width and offset musHyundai specification.

!

unevenly between rotations, have the carchecked by a Hyundai dealer so the cause maybe corrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressures and besure to check wheel nut torque.

CAUTION:Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply underany circumstances. This may cause dan-gerous handling characteristics.

 

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

!I100A02E-AAT

WARNING:o Driving on worn-out tires is dangerous!

Worn-out tires can cause loss of brakingeffectiveness, steering control and trac-tion. When replacing tires, never mixradial and bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-plytires, they must be installed in sets offour.

o Using tires and wheels of other than therecommended sizes could cause un-usual handling characteristics that couldcause death, serious injury, or propertydamage.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai's di-mensional specifications may fit poorlyand result in damage to the vehicle,

Your Hyundai is delivered with the following:

Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench Wrench bar

D060B01O

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUN

VEHICLE

I120A02A-AAT

o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Warranty.

o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Mileited Powertrain Warranty (original only).

o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal o California Emission Control System

ranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty F

vehicle

o Replacement Parts and Accessoriesited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is proin your Hyundai Owner's Handbook

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 238/253

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUALA Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

and result in damage to the vehicle,including broken wheel studs.

Wheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack

 

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

6 CONSUMER INFORMATION

WARNING:The traction grade assigned to this based on straight-ahead braking trtests, and does not include accelecornering, hydroplaning, or peak trcharacteristics.

Temperature A, B, C - The temperature are A (the highest), B, and C, representitire's resistance to the generation of heaits ability to dissipate heat when tested controlled conditions on a specified indooratory test wheel. Sustained high tempecan cause the material of the tire to degeand reduce tire life, and excessive tempcan lead to sudden tire failure. The grcorresponds to a level of performance wh

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.

I130B03A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading

Department of Transportation quality grades -All passenger vehicle tires must conform toFederal Safety Standards in addition to thesegrades. These quality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is a com-parative rating based on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For example,a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1- 1/2) times as well on the government courseas a tire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in road char-

!

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 239/253

p ppassenger car tires must meet under theeral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard NoGrades B and A represent higher levperformance on the laboratory test whee

the minimum required by law.

service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction grades,from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stopon wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test sur-faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

 

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY

!WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Quality gradescan be found on the tire sidewall between thetread shoulder and the maximum section width.For example :Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hamp-shire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina,Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River Road

Jamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Florida,Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Caro-lina, South Carolina, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas.

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, Missouri,Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesotabraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Wisconsin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizonafornia, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada

Mexico, Oregon, Texas, Utah, WashiWyoming.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-085(800) 633 5151

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 240/253

I130D03A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING" .

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

(800) 633-5151

 

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

8 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C01A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may either call theA t S f t H tli t ll f t 1 888 327

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 241/253

Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Departmentof Transportation, Washington. D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

 

9

Measurement ............................................................................9-2Engine .........................................................................................9-3Lubrication Chart .....................................................................9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 242/253

9

 

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J040A02O-AAT

ELECTRICAL

J030A01O-AAT

TIRE

J020A01O-AAT

POWER STEERING

J010A02O-AAT

MEASUREMENT

177.1 (4500)

71.5 (1820)

65.2(1655)/67.3(1710)*

65.9(1675)/68.1(1730)*

103.1 (2620)

60.6 (1540)

60.6 (1540)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Tire pressur

30 (207)

Tire

Standard

ItemBattery

Generator

2.4 DOHC 2.7 V6

110A (13.5 V)

psi

Size

225/70 R16

3.5 V6

120A (13.5

MF 68 AH (12 V)

2WD

4WD

* With roof rack

in. (mm)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 243/253

J060A01O-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J050A01O-AAT

BRAKEType

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.5 in. (142 mm)

Vane type

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Disc type

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

19 us.gal (15.8 imp.gal, 72 liter)Fuel tank capacity

 

VEHICLE SPECIF

ENGINE

3.5 V6

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.66 x 3.38 (93 x 85.8)

213.4 (3,497)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

BTDC 10° 5°

J070A02O-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke in. (mm)

Displacement cu.in. (cc)

Firing order

Spark plug

Idle speed (rpm) - N, D, A/C OFF

Ignition timing (base)

2.4 DOHC

4-Cyl., In-line DOHC

3.41 x 3.94 (86.5 x 100)

143.5 (2,351)

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

CHAMPION : RN10PYP4

NGK : PGR5C-11

800 ± 100

BTDC 7° 5°

2.7 V6

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.41 x 2.95 (86.7 x 75)

162.1 (2,656)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

BTDC 12° 5°

SPECIFICATIONS

0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm)

Type

Gap

CHAMPION : RC10PYPB4

NGK : PFR5N-11

700 ± 100

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 244/253

BTDC 10° ± 5°Ignition timing (base)

Oil grade (API)

BTDC 7° ± 5° BTDC 12° ± 5°

SH, SG or SG/CD and ABOVE multigrade and fuel-efficient oil

 

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4LUBRICATION CHART

J080A04O-AAT

Oil & Coolant Standard

API SH, Hot Climate : SAE 20W-40, 20W-50 (ABOVE 32°F or 0°C)

SG or Normal Climate : SAE 10W-30 10W-40, 10W-50 (ABOVE -10°F or -23°C)

SG/CD Cold Climate : SAE 5W-30 5W-40 (BELOW 100°F or 38°C)

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF, DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)

API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)

PSF 3 type fluid

ITEM

Engine

Transaxle Manual

Auto

Coolant

Transfer case

Rear axle

Power steering

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 245/253

PSF-3 type fluid

DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent

Power steering

Brakes and clutch fluid

 

VEHICLE SPECIF

2.43 (2.02, 2.3)

7.4 (6.16, 7.0)

0 95 (0 79 0 9)

8.98 (7.48, 8.5)

0.85 (0.7, 0.8)

1.16 (0.97,1.1)

ITEM

Engine

Transaxle Manual

Auto

Coolant

Transfer case

Rear axle

Power steering

J080A04O-AAT

2.4 DOHC

Drain & refill;

Without oil filter : 4.23 (3.52, 4.0)

With oil filter : 4.54 (3.78, 4.3)

2.7 V6

Drain & refill;

Without oil filter : 4.44 (3.7, 4.2)

With oil filter : 4.76 (3.96, 4.5)

3.5 V6

Drain & refill;

Without oil filter : 4.23 (3.52, 4.

With oil filter : 4.54 (3.78, 4.3)

-

8.66 (7.21, 8.2)

1 06 (0 88 1 0)

Quantity (US. QTS) (lmp.qts, liter)

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 246/253

0.95 (0.79, 0.9)Power steering

Brakes and clutch fluid

1.06 (0.88, 1.0)

As required

 

10

INDEX

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 247/253

10

 

10 INDEX

2

A

 Air bag ............................................................................................... 1-31

 Air Cleaner Filter ...............................................................................6-12

 Air Conditioning

Care .............................................................................................. 6-18

Operation ............................................................................ 1-85, 6-18

Switch ...........................................................................................1-84

 Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-123

 Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-55

  Audio System

Cassete tape player operation (D-285) ................................... 1-106

Compact disc player operation (H260) .......................................1-99Compact disc player operation (D-285)................................... 1-110

Compact disc player operation (D-295)................................... 1-116

Stereo radio operation (H260) .....................................................1-96

Stereo radio operation (D-285) ................................................ 1-103

Stereo radio operation (D-295) ................................................ 1-113

B

C

Calendar ..........................................................................................

Care of Cassette Tapes ................................................................

Care of Disc ...................................................................................

Cargo Security Screen ...................................................................

Catalytic Converter .........................................................................

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock.....................................................

Child Restraint System ...................................................................

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the

"Tether Anchorage" System ...................................................

Securing the Child Restraint Seat with the "ISOFIX" System ..

Cigarette Lighter ..............................................................................Clock ...............................................................................................

Clutch

Checking fluid .............................................................................

Pedal free-play ...........................................................................

Combination Light

 Auto light ......................................................................................

H dli ht fl h

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 248/253

B

Battery ..................................................................................... 2-23, 6-22

Brake

 Anti-lock brake system................................................................2-15

Brake traction control system (BTCS)........................................2-15

Checking the brakes....................................................................6-16

Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-16

Pedal clearance ...........................................................................6-20

Pedal free-play .............................................................................6-19

Practices ......................................................................................2-21

Breaking-In your New Hyundai ..........................................................1-3

Headlight flasher ........................................................................

Headlight switch .........................................................................

High-beam switch ......................................................................

Lane change signal ....................................................................

Parking light auto off ...................................................................

Turn signal operation .................................................................

Consumer Information ....................................................................

Cooling Fans ...................................................................................

 

Corrosion protection

Cleaning the interior .......................................................................4-5

Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion .......................................4-2

Washing and waxing ......................................................................4-3

Cruise Control ................................................................................... 1-75

D

Defrosting / Defogging ...................................................................... 1-87

Door 

Central door lock ............................................................................1-7

Door locks ......................................................................................1-4

Front door edge warning light ......................................................1-74Locking, unlocking front door with a key ......................................1-5

Drink Holder ......................................................................................1-55

Drive Belts .........................................................................................6-20

Driving

Driving for economy.....................................................................2-22

Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-23

Winter dri ing 2 23

If the engine overheats ..............................................................

Number .......................................................................................

Oil ...............................................................................................

Starting .......................................................................................

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ..............................................

F

Fan Speed Control ..........................................................................

Floor Mat Anchor ............................................................................

Fog Light

Front ...........................................................................................

Front Seats Adjustable front seats ................................................................

 Adjustable headrests ..................................................................

 Adjusting seat forward and rearward ........................................

 Adjusting seatback angle ...........................................................

Fuel

 Auto fuel cut switch ....................................................................

Capacit

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 249/253

Winter driving ...............................................................................2-23

E

Emission Control System ...................................................................7-2

Engine

Before starting the engine..............................................................2-3

Compartment (2.4 DOHC) ............................................................6-2

Compartment (2.7 V6) ...................................................................6-3

Compartment (3.5 V6) ...................................................................6-4

Coolant ...........................................................................................6-8

Coolant temperature gauge .........................................................1-46

Capacity .....................................................................................

Gauge .........................................................................................

Recommendations .....................................................................

Fuel Filler Lid

Remote release..........................................................................

Full-time 4WD Operation ................................................................

Fuses ..............................................................................................

G

General Checks ..............................................................................

Glove Box ........................................................................................

 

10 INDEX

4

H

Hazard Warning System ..................................................................1-52

Heating and Cooling Control .............................................................1-78

Heating and Ventilation

 Air flow control ..............................................................................1-80

 Air intake control switch ...............................................................1-79

Bi-level heating .............................................................................1-84

Defrosting / Defogging .................................................................1-87

Fan speed control (Blower control) .............................................1-79

Temperature control ....................................................................1-83

High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ......................................................... 1-71

Homelink Mirror .................................................................................1-64Hood Release....................................................................................1-72

Horn ................................................................................................. 1-75

I

Ignition Switch......................................................................................2-4

Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ................................. 1-38, 1-40

Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) 1 54

L

Light Bulbs Replacement ................................................................

Limited-Slip Differential ....................................................................

Luggage Compartment Light ..........................................................

Luggage Net ....................................................................................

M

Maintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...........................

Maintenance under severe usage conditions...........................

Scheduled maintenance ............................................................

Service requirements ................................................................Mirrors

Day-night inside rearview mirror ...............................................

Outside rearview mirror .............................................................

O

Odometer / Trip Odometer .............................................................

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 250/253

Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat).......................................1-54

Interior Light .......................................................................................1-59

J

Jump Starting ......................................................................................3-2

K

Keys ...................................................................................................1-3

If you lose your keys ...................................................................3-13

Positions .........................................................................................2-4

P

Parking Brake..................................................................................

Power Driver's Seat ........................................................................

Power Outlet....................................................................................

Power Steering Fluid Level .............................................................

 

R

Rear Seat

 Adjusting seatback angle .............................................................1-16

Folding rear seatback and seat cushion ....................................1-17

Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-52

Reporting Safety Defects ...................................................................8-8

Roof Rack .........................................................................................1-70

S

Seat

Front .............................................................................................1-11

Rear .............................................................................................. 1-16Seat warmer .................................................................................1-16

Seat Belts

3-point system .............................................................................1-21

2-point static type .........................................................................1-23

Pretensioner seat belt ..................................................................1-29

  Adjusting your seat belt ..................................................... 1-23, 1-24

Care of seat belts 1-20

Steering Wheel Free play ...............................................................

Steering Wheel Tilt Lever ................................................................

Stereo Sound System .....................................................................

Sunroof ............................................................................................

Sun Visor .........................................................................................

T

Tachometer .....................................................................................

Tail Gate ..........................................................................................

Tail gate window.........................................................................

Theft-Alarm System ........................................................................

TiresBalancing ....................................................................................

Chains ........................................................................................

Changing a flat tire .....................................................................

If you have a flat tire ...................................................................

Information ..................................................................................

Pressure .....................................................................................

Replacement

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 251/253

Care of seat belts .........................................................................1-20

Precautions .................................................................................. 1-18

Shop Manual ........................................................................................8-5

Sound

Brake pad warning sound ............................................................ 1-45

Parking start warning sound ........................................................1-45

Spark Plugs .......................................................................................6-10

Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-60

Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-47

Starting Procedure ..............................................................................2-5

Replacement ..............................................................................

Rotation ......................................................................................

Snow tires...................................................................................

Spare tire ....................................................................................

Traction ......................................................................................

Towing

 A trailer (or vehicle)....................................................................

Emergency .................................................................................

If your car must be towed ..........................................................

Traction Control System ....................................................... 2-15 ~

 

10 INDEX

6

Transaxle

 Automatic.............................................................................. 2-8, 2-11

 Automatic transaxle fluid checking ..............................................6-14

Manual ............................................................................................2-6

Manual transaxle oil checking .....................................................6-13

V

Vehicle Identification Number .............................................................8-2

Vehicle Specifications

Engine .............................................................................................9-3

Lubrication chart .................................................................. 9-4 ~ 9-5

Measurement .................................................................................9-2

W

Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................................1-42

Windows

Power ...........................................................................................1-10

Windshield Wiper and Washer..........................................................1-50

Tail gate wiper and washer switch 1-51

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 252/253

Tail gate wiper and washer switch ..............................................1 51

Windshield Wiper Blades ..................................................................6-12

 

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

FUEL:UNLEADED gasoline only

Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYUS.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 19 (15.8, 72)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-7.

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4) Oil

should be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the select

through all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then ch

level of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUIN

available at your dealer or DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF S

QUICK INDEX

o Car will not start .......................................................................o Flat tire .....................................................................................

o Warning light/chime comes on ...................................1-42 ~ 1

o Engine overheats ......................................................................

o Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3

o Starting the engine ...................................................................

o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ..........................

5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 253/253

Seoul Korea

Printing: MAR. 16, 2004

Publication No.: A26O-EU4

Printed in Korea

ENGINE OIL:API grade SH, SG or SG/CD multigrade and fuel efficient oil. Use SAE

10W-30, 10W-40 or 10W-50 if normal temperatures are above -10°F

(-23°C). For other viscosity recommendations, see page 6-6 or 9-4.

g p

o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................

o Reporting safety defects ...........................................................